Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 25709:ba4e2a641663
(SXHASH_COMBINE): Add missing parentheses.
(Fchar_table_range, Fset_char_table_default, mapcar1,
Fyes_or_no_p, sweep_weak_hash_tables): Remove unused variable(s).
| author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Tue, 14 Sep 1999 13:09:25 +0000 |
| parents | 063da8f6a487 |
| children | b7468dc89ccb |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
| 20708 | 2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 1998 |
|
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 314 | 4 |
| 5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
| 6 | |
| 7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
| 8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
|
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
| 314 | 10 any later version. |
| 11 | |
| 12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
| 13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
| 14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
| 15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
| 16 | |
| 17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
| 18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
|
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
|
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
| 314 | 21 |
| 22 #include <signal.h> | |
|
4696
1fc792473491
Include <config.h> instead of "config.h".
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
4551
diff
changeset
|
23 #include <config.h> |
|
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
| 314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
| 26 | |
| 21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
| 28 #include <unistd.h> | |
| 29 #endif | |
| 30 | |
|
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
| 314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
| 33 #include "termopts.h" | |
| 2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
|
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
|
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
| 314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
|
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
| 764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
| 314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
| 42 #include "commands.h" | |
| 43 #include "disptab.h" | |
| 44 #include "indent.h" | |
|
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
| 15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
| 21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
| 48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
| 314 | 49 |
|
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
| 12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
| 554 | 54 |
| 314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
| 56 #include "xterm.h" | |
| 25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
| 314 | 58 |
|
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
| 25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
| 64 | |
|
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
|
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
|
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
| 25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
| 69 | |
| 70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
| 71 #include <unistd.h> | |
| 72 #endif | |
| 73 | |
| 314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
| 75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
| 76 | |
| 77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
| 25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
| 79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
| 80 | |
|
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
| 25012 | 82 |
| 83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
| 84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
| 85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
| 86 | |
|
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
|
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
|
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
|
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
|
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
|
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
|
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
|
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
94 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
| 314 | 95 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
| 96 #endif | |
| 25012 | 97 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
| 98 | |
| 99 | |
| 100 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
| 101 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
| 102 | |
| 103 struct dim | |
| 104 { | |
| 105 int width; | |
| 106 int height; | |
| 107 }; | |
| 108 | |
| 109 | |
| 110 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
| 111 | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
112 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
113 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
| 25012 | 114 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
| 115 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
| 116 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
| 117 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
| 118 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
| 119 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
| 120 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
| 121 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
| 122 struct dim)); | |
| 123 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
| 124 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
| 125 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
| 126 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
| 127 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
| 128 int, int, struct dim)); | |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
129 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
| 25012 | 130 static void swap_glyphs_in_rows P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
| 131 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
| 132 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
| 133 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
| 134 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
| 135 struct window *)); | |
| 136 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
| 137 struct window *)); | |
| 138 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
| 139 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
| 140 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
| 141 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
| 142 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
| 143 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
| 144 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
| 145 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
| 146 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
| 147 int, int)); | |
| 148 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
| 149 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
| 150 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
151 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
| 25012 | 152 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
153 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
| 25012 | 154 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
| 155 int)); | |
| 156 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
| 157 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
158 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
| 25012 | 159 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
| 160 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
161 #endif |
| 25012 | 162 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
| 163 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
| 164 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
| 165 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
| 166 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
| 167 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
| 168 struct glyph_row *)); | |
| 169 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
| 170 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
| 171 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
| 172 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
| 173 | |
| 174 | |
| 175 | |
| 176 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
| 177 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
| 178 scrolling. */ | |
| 179 | |
| 180 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
|
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
181 |
| 554 | 182 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
| 764 | 183 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
| 314 | 184 |
| 764 | 185 int frame_garbaged; |
| 314 | 186 |
| 25012 | 187 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
| 314 | 188 |
| 189 int display_completed; | |
| 190 | |
| 25012 | 191 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
| 192 audible bell. */ | |
| 314 | 193 |
| 194 int visible_bell; | |
| 195 | |
| 764 | 196 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
| 314 | 197 |
| 198 int inverse_video; | |
| 199 | |
| 200 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
| 201 | |
| 202 int baud_rate; | |
| 203 | |
| 25012 | 204 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
| 205 is running. */ | |
| 314 | 206 |
| 207 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
| 208 | |
| 209 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
| 25012 | 210 |
| 314 | 211 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
| 212 | |
| 25012 | 213 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
| 214 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
| 314 | 215 |
| 216 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
| 25012 | 217 as a character code. |
| 218 | |
| 219 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
| 220 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
| 314 | 221 |
| 222 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
| 223 | |
| 224 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
| 225 | |
| 226 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
| 227 | |
| 25012 | 228 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
| 229 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
| 230 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
| 231 | |
| 314 | 232 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
|
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
233 |
|
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
234 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
| 25012 | 235 |
| 314 | 236 |
| 25012 | 237 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
238 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
|
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
239 |
|
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
240 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
| 25012 | 241 |
| 242 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
| 764 | 243 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
| 9572 | 244 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
| 245 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
| 25012 | 246 |
| 247 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
| 248 | |
| 249 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
| 250 | |
| 251 FILE *termscript; | |
| 252 | |
| 253 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
| 254 | |
| 255 struct cm Wcm; | |
| 256 | |
| 257 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
| 258 | |
| 259 int delayed_size_change; | |
| 260 | |
| 261 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
| 262 | |
| 263 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
| 264 | |
| 265 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
| 266 | |
| 267 struct window *updated_window; | |
| 268 | |
| 269 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
| 270 | |
| 271 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
| 272 int updated_area; | |
| 273 | |
| 274 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
| 275 | |
| 276 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
| 277 | |
| 278 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
| 279 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
| 280 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
| 281 | |
| 282 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
| 283 | |
| 284 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
| 285 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
| 286 | |
| 287 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
| 288 int glyph_pool_count; | |
| 289 | |
| 290 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
| 291 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
| 292 | |
| 293 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
| 294 | |
| 295 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
| 296 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
| 297 | |
| 298 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
| 299 | |
| 300 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
| 301 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
| 302 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
| 303 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
| 304 loaded on demand. */ | |
| 305 | |
| 306 int fonts_changed_p; | |
| 307 | |
| 308 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
| 309 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
| 310 | |
| 311 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
| 312 | |
| 313 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
| 314 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
| 315 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
| 316 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
| 317 | |
| 318 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
| 319 | |
| 320 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
| 321 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
| 322 | |
| 323 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
| 324 | |
| 325 | |
| 326 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
| 327 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
| 328 address of this function is used. */ | |
| 314 | 329 |
| 330 void | |
| 331 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
| 332 char *from, *to; | |
| 333 int size; | |
| 334 { | |
|
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
335 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
| 314 | 336 return; |
| 337 | |
|
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
338 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
339 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
340 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
341 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
342 bcopy (from, to, size); |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
343 |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
344 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
345 else |
| 314 | 346 { |
|
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
347 register char *endf = from + size; |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 register char *endt = to + size; |
| 314 | 349 |
| 350 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
| 351 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
| 352 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
| 353 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
|
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
354 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
355 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
| 314 | 356 if (to - from < 64) |
| 357 { | |
| 358 do | |
| 359 *--endt = *--endf; | |
| 360 while (endf != from); | |
| 361 } | |
| 362 else | |
| 363 { | |
|
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
364 for (;;) |
| 314 | 365 { |
| 366 endt -= (to - from); | |
| 367 endf -= (to - from); | |
| 368 | |
|
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
369 if (endt < to) |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
370 break; |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
371 |
| 314 | 372 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
| 373 } | |
|
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
374 |
|
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
375 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
| 25012 | 376 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
| 377 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
| 314 | 378 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
| 379 } | |
| 380 } | |
| 381 } | |
| 382 | |
| 25012 | 383 |
| 384 | |
| 385 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 386 Glyph Matrices | |
| 387 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 388 | |
| 389 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
| 390 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
| 391 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
| 392 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
| 393 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
| 394 | |
| 395 struct glyph_matrix * | |
| 396 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
| 397 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
| 398 { | |
| 399 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
| 400 | |
| 401 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
| 402 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
| 403 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
| 404 | |
| 405 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
| 406 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
| 407 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
| 408 | |
| 409 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
| 410 result->pool = pool; | |
| 411 return result; | |
| 412 } | |
| 413 | |
| 414 | |
| 415 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
| 416 | |
| 417 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
| 418 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
| 419 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
| 420 pointer was passed to this function. | |
| 421 | |
| 422 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
| 423 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
| 424 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
| 425 | |
| 426 static void | |
| 427 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
| 428 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 429 { | |
| 430 if (matrix) | |
| 431 { | |
| 432 int i; | |
| 433 | |
| 434 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
| 435 allocated. */ | |
| 436 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
| 437 abort (); | |
| 438 | |
| 439 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
| 440 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
| 441 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
| 442 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
| 443 | |
| 444 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
| 445 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
| 446 xfree (matrix); | |
| 447 } | |
| 448 } | |
| 449 | |
| 450 | |
| 451 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
| 452 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
| 453 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
| 454 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
| 455 or a float. */ | |
| 456 | |
| 457 static int | |
| 458 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
| 459 struct window *w; | |
| 460 int total_glyphs; | |
| 461 Lisp_Object margin; | |
| 462 { | |
| 463 int n; | |
| 464 | |
| 465 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
| 466 { | |
| 467 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
| 468 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
| 469 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
| 470 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
| 471 } | |
| 472 else | |
| 473 n = 0; | |
| 474 | |
| 475 return n; | |
| 476 } | |
| 477 | |
| 478 | |
| 479 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
| 480 window sizes. | |
| 481 | |
| 482 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
| 483 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
| 484 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
| 485 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
| 486 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
| 487 | |
| 488 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
| 489 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
| 490 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
| 491 MATRIX->pool. | |
| 492 | |
| 493 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
| 494 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
| 495 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
| 496 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
| 497 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
| 498 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
| 499 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
| 500 | |
| 501 static void | |
| 502 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
| 503 struct window *w; | |
| 504 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 505 int x, y; | |
| 506 struct dim dim; | |
| 507 { | |
| 508 int i; | |
| 509 int new_rows; | |
| 510 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
| 25546 | 511 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
| 512 int header_line_p = 0; | |
| 25012 | 513 int left = -1, right = -1; |
| 514 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
| 515 | |
| 516 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
| 517 if (w) | |
| 518 { | |
| 25546 | 519 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
| 520 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
| 25012 | 521 } |
| 25546 | 522 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
| 25012 | 523 |
| 524 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
| 525 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
| 526 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
| 527 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
| 528 { | |
| 529 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
| 530 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
| 531 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
| 532 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
| 533 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
| 534 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
| 535 | |
| 536 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
| 537 && !fonts_changed_p | |
| 25546 | 538 && !header_line_changed_p |
| 25012 | 539 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
| 540 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
| 541 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
| 542 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
| 543 return; | |
| 544 } | |
| 545 | |
| 546 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
| 547 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
| 548 { | |
| 549 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
| 550 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
| 551 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
| 552 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
| 553 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
| 554 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
| 555 } | |
| 556 else | |
| 557 new_rows = 0; | |
| 558 | |
| 559 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
| 560 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
| 561 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
| 562 if (matrix->pool) | |
| 563 { | |
| 564 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
| 565 | |
| 566 if (w) | |
| 567 { | |
| 568 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
| 569 w->left_margin_width); | |
| 570 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
| 571 w->right_margin_width); | |
| 572 } | |
| 573 else | |
| 574 left = right = 0; | |
| 575 | |
| 576 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
| 577 { | |
| 578 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
| 579 | |
| 580 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
| 581 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
| 582 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
| 583 + x); | |
| 584 | |
| 585 if (w == NULL | |
| 586 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
| 25546 | 587 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
| 25012 | 588 { |
| 589 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 590 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 591 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
| 592 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
| 593 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
| 594 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 595 } | |
| 596 else | |
| 597 { | |
| 598 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 599 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
| 600 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
| 601 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
| 602 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
| 603 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
| 604 } | |
| 605 } | |
| 606 | |
| 607 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
| 608 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
| 609 } | |
| 610 else | |
| 611 { | |
| 612 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
| 613 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
| 614 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
| 615 || new_rows | |
| 25546 | 616 || header_line_changed_p |
| 25012 | 617 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
| 618 { | |
| 619 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
| 620 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
| 621 | |
| 622 while (row < end) | |
| 623 { | |
| 624 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
| 625 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
| 626 (dim.width | |
| 627 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
| 628 | |
| 629 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
| 630 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
| 25546 | 631 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
| 25012 | 632 { |
| 633 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 634 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 635 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
| 636 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
| 637 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
| 638 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 639 } | |
| 640 else | |
| 641 { | |
| 642 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 643 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
| 644 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
| 645 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
| 646 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
| 647 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
| 648 } | |
| 649 ++row; | |
| 650 } | |
| 651 } | |
| 652 | |
| 653 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
| 654 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
| 655 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
| 656 } | |
| 657 | |
| 658 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
| 659 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
| 660 | |
| 661 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
| 662 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
| 663 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
| 664 when this function runs. */ | |
| 665 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
| 666 { | |
| 667 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
| 668 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
| 669 of the window. */ | |
| 670 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
| 671 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
| 672 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
| 673 { | |
| 674 i = 0; | |
| 675 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
| 676 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
| 677 < matrix->window_height)) | |
| 678 ++i; | |
| 679 | |
| 680 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
| 681 are invalidated. */ | |
| 682 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
| 683 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
| 684 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
| 685 | |
| 686 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
| 687 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
| 688 } | |
| 689 else | |
| 690 { | |
| 691 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
| 692 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
| 693 } | |
| 694 } | |
| 695 | |
| 696 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
| 697 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
| 698 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
| 699 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
| 700 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
| 701 | |
| 702 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
| 703 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
| 704 if (w) | |
| 705 { | |
| 706 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
| 707 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
| 708 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
| 709 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
| 710 } | |
| 711 } | |
| 712 | |
| 713 | |
| 714 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
| 715 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
| 716 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
| 717 below). */ | |
| 314 | 718 |
| 719 static void | |
| 25012 | 720 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
| 721 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 722 int start, end; | |
| 314 | 723 { |
| 25012 | 724 int i, j; |
| 725 | |
| 726 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
| 727 { | |
| 728 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
| 729 initialization. */ | |
| 730 struct glyph_row temp; | |
| 731 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
| 732 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
| 733 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
| 734 } | |
| 314 | 735 } |
| 736 | |
| 25012 | 737 |
| 738 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
| 739 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
| 740 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
| 741 row structures are moved around). | |
| 742 | |
| 743 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
| 744 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
| 745 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
| 746 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
| 747 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
| 748 rotating right. */ | |
| 749 | |
| 750 void | |
| 751 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
| 752 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 753 int first, last, by; | |
| 314 | 754 { |
| 25012 | 755 if (by < 0) |
| 756 { | |
| 757 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
| 758 by = -by; | |
| 759 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
| 760 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
| 761 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
| 762 } | |
| 763 else if (by > 0) | |
| 314 | 764 { |
| 25012 | 765 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
| 766 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
| 767 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
| 768 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
| 314 | 769 } |
| 25012 | 770 } |
| 771 | |
| 772 | |
| 773 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
| 774 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
| 775 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
| 776 | |
| 777 void | |
| 778 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, | |
| 779 delta_bytes) | |
| 780 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 781 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
| 782 { | |
| 783 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
| 784 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
| 785 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
| 786 xassert (start <= end); | |
| 787 | |
| 788 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
| 789 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (matrix->rows + start, | |
| 790 delta, delta_bytes); | |
| 791 } | |
| 792 | |
| 793 | |
| 794 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
| 795 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
| 796 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
| 797 | |
| 798 void | |
| 799 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
| 800 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 801 int start, end; | |
| 802 int enabled_p; | |
| 803 { | |
| 804 xassert (start <= end); | |
| 805 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
| 806 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
| 807 | |
| 808 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
| 809 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
| 810 } | |
| 811 | |
| 812 | |
| 813 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
| 814 | |
| 815 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
| 816 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
| 817 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
| 818 enabled_p flag. | |
| 819 | |
| 820 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
| 821 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
| 822 | |
| 823 void | |
| 824 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
| 825 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 826 { | |
| 827 if (matrix) | |
| 314 | 828 { |
| 25012 | 829 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
| 830 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
| 314 | 831 } |
| 832 } | |
| 25012 | 833 |
| 834 | |
| 835 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
| 836 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
| 837 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
| 838 | |
| 839 void | |
| 840 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
| 841 struct window *w; | |
| 842 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 843 int start, end, dy; | |
| 844 { | |
| 845 int min_y, max_y; | |
| 846 | |
| 847 xassert (start <= end); | |
| 848 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
| 849 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
| 850 | |
| 25546 | 851 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
| 25012 | 852 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
| 853 | |
| 854 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
| 855 { | |
| 856 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
| 857 | |
| 858 row->y += dy; | |
| 859 | |
| 860 if (row->y < min_y) | |
| 861 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
| 862 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
| 863 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
| 864 else | |
| 865 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
| 866 } | |
| 867 } | |
| 868 | |
| 869 | |
| 870 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
| 871 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
| 872 current matrix. */ | |
| 873 | |
| 874 void | |
| 875 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
| 876 register struct frame *f; | |
| 877 { | |
| 878 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
| 879 if (f->current_matrix) | |
| 880 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
| 881 | |
| 882 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
| 883 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
| 884 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
| 885 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
| 886 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
| 887 | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
888 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
889 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
890 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
| 25012 | 891 |
| 892 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
| 893 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
| 894 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
| 895 } | |
| 896 | |
| 897 | |
| 898 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
| 314 | 899 |
| 21514 | 900 void |
| 25012 | 901 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
| 902 register struct frame *f; | |
| 314 | 903 { |
| 25012 | 904 if (f->desired_matrix) |
| 905 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
| 906 | |
| 907 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
| 908 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
| 909 | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
910 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
911 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
| 25012 | 912 |
| 913 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
| 914 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
| 915 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
| 916 } | |
| 917 | |
| 918 | |
| 919 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
| 920 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
| 921 | |
| 922 static void | |
| 923 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
| 924 struct window *w; | |
| 925 int desired_p; | |
| 926 { | |
| 927 while (w) | |
| 314 | 928 { |
| 25012 | 929 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
| 930 { | |
| 931 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
| 932 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
| 933 } | |
| 934 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 314 | 935 { |
| 25012 | 936 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
| 937 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
| 938 } | |
| 939 else | |
| 940 { | |
| 941 if (desired_p) | |
| 942 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
| 943 else | |
| 314 | 944 { |
| 25012 | 945 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
| 946 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
| 314 | 947 } |
| 25012 | 948 } |
| 949 | |
| 950 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
| 951 } | |
| 952 } | |
| 953 | |
| 954 | |
| 955 | |
| 956 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 957 Glyph Rows | |
| 958 | |
| 959 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
| 960 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 961 | |
| 962 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
| 963 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
| 964 structure members. */ | |
| 965 | |
| 966 void | |
| 967 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
| 968 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 969 { | |
| 970 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
| 971 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
| 972 | |
| 973 /* Save pointers. */ | |
| 974 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 975 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 976 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 977 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
| 978 | |
| 979 /* Clear. */ | |
| 980 *row = null_row; | |
| 981 | |
| 982 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
| 983 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 984 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 985 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
| 986 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
| 987 } | |
| 988 | |
| 989 | |
| 990 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
| 991 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
| 992 | |
| 993 void | |
| 994 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
| 995 struct window *w; | |
| 996 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 997 int y; | |
| 998 { | |
| 999 int min_y, max_y; | |
| 1000 | |
| 25546 | 1001 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
| 25012 | 1002 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
| 1003 | |
| 1004 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
| 1005 row->y = y; | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1006 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1007 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
| 25012 | 1008 |
| 1009 if (row->y < min_y) | |
| 1010 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
| 1011 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
| 1012 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
| 1013 else | |
| 1014 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
| 1015 | |
| 1016 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
| 1017 } | |
| 1018 | |
| 1019 | |
| 1020 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
| 1021 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
| 1022 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
| 1023 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
| 1024 ends. */ | |
| 1025 | |
| 1026 void | |
| 1027 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) | |
| 1028 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 1029 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
| 1030 { | |
| 1031 int area, i; | |
| 1032 | |
| 1033 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
| 1034 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
| 1035 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
| 1036 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
| 1037 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
| 1038 | |
| 1039 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
| 1040 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
| 1041 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
| 1042 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
| 1043 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
| 1044 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
| 1045 | |
| 1046 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
| 1047 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
| 1048 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
| 1049 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
| 1050 } | |
| 1051 | |
| 1052 | |
| 1053 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph | |
| 1054 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
| 1055 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
| 1056 | |
| 1057 static void | |
| 1058 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
| 1059 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
| 1060 { | |
| 1061 int area; | |
| 1062 | |
| 1063 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
| 1064 { | |
| 1065 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
| 1066 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
| 1067 | |
| 1068 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
| 1069 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
| 1070 | |
| 1071 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
| 1072 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
| 1073 | |
| 1074 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
| 1075 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
| 1076 | |
| 1077 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
| 1078 { | |
| 1079 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
| 1080 initialization. */ | |
| 1081 struct glyph temp; | |
| 1082 temp = *glyph_a; | |
| 1083 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
| 1084 *glyph_b = temp; | |
| 1085 ++glyph_a; | |
| 1086 ++glyph_b; | |
| 314 | 1087 } |
| 1088 } | |
| 1089 } | |
| 25012 | 1090 |
| 1091 | |
| 1092 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 static INLINE void | |
| 1095 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
| 1096 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
| 1097 { | |
| 1098 int i; | |
| 1099 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
| 1100 { | |
| 1101 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
| 1102 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
| 1103 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
| 1104 } | |
| 1105 } | |
| 1106 | |
| 1107 | |
| 1108 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
| 1109 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
| 1110 | |
| 1111 INLINE void | |
| 1112 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
| 1113 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
| 1114 { | |
| 1115 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
| 1116 | |
| 1117 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
| 1118 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
| 1121 *to = *from; | |
| 1122 | |
| 1123 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
| 1124 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
| 1125 } | |
| 1126 | |
| 1127 | |
| 1128 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
| 1129 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
| 1130 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
| 1131 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
| 1132 | |
| 1133 void | |
| 1134 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
| 1135 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
| 1136 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
| 1137 { | |
| 1138 int area; | |
| 1139 | |
| 1140 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
| 1141 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
| 1142 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
| 1143 | |
| 1144 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
| 1145 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
| 1146 if (from->used[area]) | |
| 1147 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
| 1148 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
| 1149 | |
| 1150 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
| 1151 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); | |
| 1152 } | |
| 1153 | |
| 1154 | |
| 1155 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
| 1156 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
| 1157 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
| 1158 a memory leak. */ | |
| 1159 | |
| 1160 static INLINE void | |
| 1161 assign_row (to, from) | |
| 1162 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
| 1163 { | |
| 1164 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
| 1165 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
| 1166 } | |
| 1167 | |
| 1168 | |
| 1169 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
| 1170 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
| 1171 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
| 1172 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
| 1173 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
| 1174 | |
| 1175 static int | |
| 1176 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
| 1177 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
| 1178 { | |
| 1179 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
| 1180 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
| 1181 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
| 1182 | |
| 1183 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
| 1184 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
| 1185 } | |
| 1186 | |
| 1187 | |
| 1188 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice | |
| 1189 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
| 1190 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
| 1191 | |
| 1192 static struct glyph_row * | |
| 1193 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
| 1194 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
| 1195 int row; | |
| 1196 { | |
| 1197 int i; | |
| 1198 | |
| 1199 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
| 1200 | |
| 1201 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
| 1202 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
| 1203 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
| 1204 break; | |
| 1205 | |
| 1206 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
| 1207 } | |
| 1208 | |
| 1209 | |
| 1210 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
| 1211 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
| 1212 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
| 1213 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
| 1214 | |
| 1215 void | |
| 1216 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
| 1217 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 1218 { | |
| 1219 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
| 1220 { | |
| 1221 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
| 1222 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
| 1223 } | |
| 1224 } | |
| 1225 | |
| 1226 | |
| 1227 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
| 1228 | |
| 1229 int | |
| 1230 line_hash_code (row) | |
| 1231 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 1232 { | |
| 1233 int hash = 0; | |
| 1234 | |
| 1235 if (row->enabled_p) | |
| 1236 { | |
| 1237 if (row->inverse_p) | |
| 1238 { | |
| 1239 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
| 1240 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
| 1241 hash = -1; | |
| 1242 } | |
| 1243 else | |
| 1244 { | |
| 1245 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 1246 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 1247 | |
| 1248 while (glyph < end) | |
| 1249 { | |
| 1250 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*glyph); | |
| 1251 if (must_write_spaces) | |
| 1252 g -= SPACEGLYPH; | |
| 1253 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + g; | |
| 1254 ++glyph; | |
| 1255 } | |
| 1256 | |
| 1257 if (hash == 0) | |
| 1258 hash = 1; | |
| 1259 } | |
| 1260 } | |
| 1261 | |
| 1262 return hash; | |
| 1263 } | |
| 1264 | |
| 1265 | |
| 1266 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
| 1267 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
| 1268 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
| 1269 | |
| 1270 static unsigned int | |
| 1271 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
| 1272 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 1273 int vpos; | |
| 1274 { | |
| 1275 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
| 1276 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 1277 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 1278 int len; | |
| 1279 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
| 1280 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
| 1281 | |
| 1282 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
| 1283 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
| 1284 { | |
| 1285 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
| 1286 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
| 1287 --end; | |
| 1288 | |
| 1289 /* All blank line. */ | |
| 1290 if (end == beg) | |
| 1291 return 0; | |
| 1292 | |
| 1293 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
| 1294 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
| 1295 ++beg; | |
| 1296 } | |
| 1297 | |
| 1298 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
| 1299 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
| 1300 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
| 1301 len = end - beg; | |
| 1302 else | |
| 1303 { | |
| 1304 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
| 1305 in LEN. */ | |
| 1306 len = 0; | |
| 1307 while (beg < end) | |
| 1308 { | |
| 1309 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
| 1310 | |
| 1311 if (GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) | |
| 1312 len += 1; | |
| 1313 else | |
| 1314 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
| 1315 | |
| 1316 ++beg; | |
| 1317 } | |
| 1318 } | |
| 1319 | |
| 1320 return len; | |
| 1321 } | |
| 1322 | |
| 1323 | |
| 1324 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
| 1325 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
| 1326 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
| 1327 visibility. */ | |
| 1328 | |
| 1329 static INLINE int | |
| 1330 row_equal_p (w, a, b) | |
| 1331 struct window *w; | |
| 1332 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
| 1333 { | |
| 1334 if (a == b) | |
| 1335 return 1; | |
| 1336 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
| 1337 return 0; | |
| 1338 else | |
| 1339 { | |
| 1340 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
| 1341 int area; | |
| 1342 | |
| 1343 /* Compare glyphs. */ | |
| 1344 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
| 1345 { | |
| 1346 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
| 1347 return 0; | |
| 1348 | |
| 1349 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
| 1350 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
| 1351 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
| 1352 | |
| 1353 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
| 1354 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
| 1355 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
| 1356 | |
| 1357 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
| 1358 return 0; | |
| 1359 } | |
| 1360 | |
| 1361 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
| 1362 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
| 1363 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
| 1364 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
| 1365 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
| 1366 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
| 1367 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1368 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
| 25012 | 1369 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
| 1370 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
| 1371 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
| 1372 || a->x != b->x | |
| 1373 /* Different height. */ | |
| 1374 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1375 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1376 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
| 25012 | 1377 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
| 1378 return 0; | |
| 1379 } | |
| 1380 | |
| 1381 return 1; | |
| 1382 } | |
| 1383 | |
| 1384 | |
| 314 | 1385 |
| 25012 | 1386 /*********************************************************************** |
| 1387 Glyph Pool | |
| 1388 | |
| 1389 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
| 1390 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 1391 | |
| 1392 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
| 1393 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
| 1394 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
| 1395 | |
| 1396 static struct glyph_pool * | |
| 1397 new_glyph_pool () | |
| 1398 { | |
| 1399 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
| 1400 | |
| 1401 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
| 1402 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
| 1403 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
| 1406 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
| 1407 | |
| 1408 return result; | |
| 1409 } | |
| 1410 | |
| 1411 | |
| 1412 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
| 1413 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
| 1414 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
| 1415 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
| 1416 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
| 1417 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
| 1418 | |
| 1419 static void | |
| 1420 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
| 1421 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
| 1422 { | |
| 1423 if (pool) | |
| 1424 { | |
| 1425 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
| 1426 --glyph_pool_count; | |
| 1427 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
| 1428 | |
| 1429 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
| 1430 xfree (pool); | |
| 1431 } | |
| 1432 } | |
| 1433 | |
| 1434 | |
| 1435 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
| 1436 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
| 1437 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
| 1438 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
| 1439 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
| 1440 | |
| 1441 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
| 1442 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
| 1443 | |
| 1444 static int | |
| 1445 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
| 1446 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
| 1447 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
| 1448 { | |
| 1449 int needed; | |
| 1450 int changed_p; | |
| 1451 | |
| 1452 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
| 1453 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
| 1454 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
| 1455 | |
| 1456 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
| 1457 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
| 1458 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
| 1459 { | |
| 1460 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
| 1461 | |
| 1462 if (pool->glyphs) | |
| 1463 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
| 1464 else | |
| 1465 { | |
| 1466 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
| 1467 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
| 1468 } | |
| 1469 | |
| 1470 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
| 1471 } | |
| 1472 | |
| 1473 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
| 1474 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
| 1475 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
| 1476 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
| 1477 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
| 1478 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 return changed_p; | |
| 1481 } | |
| 1482 | |
| 1483 | |
| 1484 | |
| 1485 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 1486 Debug Code | |
| 1487 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 1488 | |
| 1489 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
| 1490 | |
| 1491 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a | |
| 1492 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
| 1493 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
| 1494 MATRIX. */ | |
| 1495 | |
| 1496 void | |
| 1497 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
| 1498 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 1499 { | |
| 1500 int i, j; | |
| 1501 | |
| 1502 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
| 1503 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
| 1504 xassert (i == j | |
| 1505 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 1506 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
| 1507 } | |
| 1508 | |
| 1509 | |
| 1510 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
| 1511 | |
| 1512 struct glyph_row * | |
| 1513 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
| 1514 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 1515 int row; | |
| 1516 { | |
| 1517 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
| 1518 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
| 1519 | |
| 1520 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
| 1521 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
| 1522 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
| 314 | 1523 #if 0 |
| 25012 | 1524 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
| 1525 #endif | |
| 1526 | |
| 1527 return matrix->rows + row; | |
| 1528 } | |
| 1529 | |
| 1530 | |
| 1531 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
| 1532 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
| 1533 nevertheless. */ | |
| 1534 | |
| 1535 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
| 1536 window W. */ | |
| 1537 | |
| 1538 static void | |
| 1539 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
| 314 | 1540 struct window *w; |
| 1541 { | |
| 25012 | 1542 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
| 1543 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
| 1544 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
| 1545 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
| 1546 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
| 1547 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
| 1548 int c; | |
| 1549 | |
| 1550 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
| 1551 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
| 1552 return; | |
| 1553 | |
| 1554 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
| 1555 | |
| 1556 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
| 1557 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
| 1558 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
| 1559 { | |
| 1560 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
| 1561 | |
| 1562 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
| 1563 last_text_row = row; | |
| 1564 | |
| 1565 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
| 1566 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
| 1567 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
| 1568 | |
| 1569 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
| 1570 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
| 1571 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
| 1572 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
| 1573 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
| 1574 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
| 1575 | |
| 1576 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
| 1577 of next row. */ | |
| 1578 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
| 1579 { | |
| 1580 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
| 1581 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
| 1582 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
| 1583 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
| 1584 } | |
| 1585 row = next; | |
| 1586 } | |
| 1587 | |
| 1588 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
| 1589 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
| 1590 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
| 1591 } | |
| 1592 | |
| 1593 #endif /* 0 */ | |
| 1594 | |
| 1595 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
| 1596 | |
| 1597 | |
| 1598 | |
| 1599 /********************************************************************** | |
| 1600 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
| 1601 **********************************************************************/ | |
| 1602 | |
| 1603 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
| 1604 redisplay | |
| 1605 | |
| 1606 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
| 1607 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
| 1608 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
| 1609 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
| 1610 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
| 1611 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
| 1612 performed. | |
| 1613 | |
| 1614 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
| 1615 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
| 1616 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
| 1617 | |
| 1618 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
| 1619 | |
| 1620 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
| 1621 glyph matrices yet, and | |
| 1622 | |
| 1623 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
| 1624 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
| 1625 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
| 1628 function. | |
| 1629 | |
| 1630 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
| 1631 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
| 1632 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
| 1633 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
| 1634 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
| 1635 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
| 1636 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
| 1637 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
| 1638 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
| 1639 | |
| 1640 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
| 1641 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
| 1642 necessary. | |
| 1643 | |
| 1644 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
| 1645 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
| 1646 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
| 1647 windows in the sequence. | |
| 1648 | |
| 1649 |<------- result width ------->| | |
| 1650 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
| 1651 | | | | | | |
| 1652 | | | | | |
| 1653 +---------+ | | result height | |
| 1654 | +---------+ | |
| 1655 | | | | |
| 1656 +----------+ --- | |
| 1657 | |
| 1658 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
| 1659 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
| 1660 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
| 1661 | |
| 1662 |<---- result width -->| | |
| 1663 +---------+ --- | |
| 1664 | | | | |
| 1665 | | | | |
| 1666 +---------+--+ | | |
| 1667 | | | | |
| 1668 | | result height | |
| 1669 | | | |
| 1670 +------------+---------+ | | |
| 1671 | | | | |
| 1672 | | | | |
| 1673 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
| 1674 | |
| 1675 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
| 1676 allocated. */ | |
| 1677 | |
| 1678 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
| 1679 | |
| 1680 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
| 1681 size. */ | |
| 1682 | |
| 1683 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
| 1684 | |
| 1685 static struct dim | |
| 1686 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
| 1687 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
| 1688 Lisp_Object window; | |
| 1689 int x, y; | |
| 1690 struct dim ch_dim; | |
| 1691 int dim_only_p; | |
| 1692 int *window_change_flags; | |
| 1693 { | |
| 1694 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
| 1695 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
| 1696 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
| 1697 struct dim total; | |
| 1698 struct dim dim; | |
| 1699 struct window *w; | |
| 1700 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
| 1701 | |
| 1702 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
| 1703 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
| 1704 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
| 1705 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
| 1706 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
| 1707 vertically below other windows. */ | |
| 1708 in_horz_combination_p | |
| 1709 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
| 1710 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
| 1711 | |
| 1712 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
| 1713 do | |
| 1714 { | |
| 1715 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
| 1716 | |
| 1717 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
| 1718 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
| 1719 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 1720 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
| 1721 dim_only_p, | |
| 1722 window_change_flags); | |
| 1723 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 1724 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
| 1725 dim_only_p, | |
| 1726 window_change_flags); | |
| 1727 else | |
| 1728 { | |
| 1729 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
| 1730 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
| 1731 { | |
| 1732 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
| 1733 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
| 1734 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
| 1735 } | |
| 1736 | |
| 1737 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
| 1738 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
| 1739 dim.width = w->width; | |
| 1740 dim.height = w->height; | |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
| 1743 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
| 1744 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
| 1745 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
| 1746 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
| 1747 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
| 1748 w->right_margin_width) | |
| 1749 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
| 1750 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
| 1751 w->left_margin_width) | |
| 1752 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
| 1753 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
| 1754 | |
| 1755 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
| 1756 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
| 1757 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
| 1758 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
| 1759 necessary. */ | |
| 1760 if (!dim_only_p) | |
| 1761 { | |
| 1762 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
| 1763 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
| 1764 } | |
| 1765 } | |
| 1766 | |
| 1767 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
| 1768 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
| 1769 below W. */ | |
| 1770 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
| 1771 x += dim.width; | |
| 1772 else | |
| 1773 y += dim.height; | |
| 1774 | |
| 1775 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
| 1776 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
| 1777 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
| 1778 | |
| 1779 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
| 1780 window = w->next; | |
| 1781 } | |
| 1782 while (!NILP (window)); | |
| 1783 | |
| 1784 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
| 1785 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
| 1786 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
| 1787 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
| 1788 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
| 1789 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
| 1790 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
| 1791 { | |
| 1792 total.width = x - x0; | |
| 1793 total.height = hmax; | |
| 1794 } | |
| 1795 else | |
| 1796 { | |
| 1797 total.width = wmax; | |
| 1798 total.height = y - y0; | |
| 1799 } | |
| 1800 | |
| 1801 return total; | |
| 1802 } | |
| 1803 | |
| 1804 | |
| 1805 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
| 1806 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
| 1807 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
| 1808 | |
| 1809 static void | |
| 1810 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
| 1811 struct window *w; | |
| 1812 struct dim ch_dim; | |
| 1813 { | |
| 1814 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
| 1815 | |
| 1816 while (w) | |
| 314 | 1817 { |
| 25012 | 1818 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
| 1819 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
| 1820 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 1821 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
| 1822 else | |
| 314 | 1823 { |
| 25012 | 1824 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
| 1825 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
| 1826 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
| 1827 struct dim dim; | |
| 1828 | |
| 1829 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
| 1830 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
| 314 | 1831 { |
| 25012 | 1832 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
| 1833 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
| 314 | 1834 } |
| 25012 | 1835 |
| 1836 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
| 1837 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
| 1838 / ch_dim.width) | |
| 1839 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
| 1840 + 2 | |
| 1841 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
| 1842 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
| 1843 + 1 + 1); | |
| 1844 | |
| 1845 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
| 1846 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
| 1847 / ch_dim.height) | |
| 1848 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
| 1849 bottom of the window. */ | |
| 1850 + 2 | |
| 1851 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
| 1852 + 2); | |
| 1853 | |
| 1854 /* Change matrices. */ | |
| 1855 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
| 1856 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
| 1857 } | |
| 1858 | |
| 1859 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
| 1860 } | |
| 1861 } | |
| 1862 | |
| 1863 | |
| 1864 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
| 1865 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
| 1866 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
| 1867 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
| 1868 | |
| 1869 void | |
| 1870 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
| 1871 struct frame *f; | |
| 1872 { | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1873 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1874 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1875 BLOCK_INPUT; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1876 |
| 25012 | 1877 if (f) |
| 1878 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
| 1879 else | |
| 1880 { | |
| 1881 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
| 1882 | |
| 1883 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
| 1884 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
| 1885 } | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1886 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1887 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
| 25012 | 1888 } |
| 1889 | |
| 1890 | |
| 1891 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
| 1892 | |
| 1893 To be called from init_display. | |
| 1894 | |
| 1895 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
| 1896 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
| 1897 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
| 1898 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
| 1899 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
| 1900 windows to estimated values. */ | |
| 1901 | |
| 1902 static void | |
| 1903 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
| 1904 { | |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1905 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
|
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1906 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
| 25012 | 1907 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1908 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
|
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1909 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
|
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1910 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
| 25012 | 1911 |
| 1912 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
| 1913 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
| 1914 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1915 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
| 25012 | 1916 |
| 1917 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
| 1918 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
| 1919 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
| 1920 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
| 1921 | |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1922 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
| 25012 | 1923 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
| 1924 } | |
| 1925 | |
| 1926 | |
| 1927 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
| 1928 | |
| 1929 static void | |
| 1930 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
| 1931 struct frame *f; | |
| 1932 { | |
| 1933 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
| 1934 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
| 1935 else | |
| 1936 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
| 1937 | |
| 1938 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
| 1939 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
| 1940 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
| 1941 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
| 1944 } | |
| 1945 | |
| 1946 | |
| 1947 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
| 1948 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
| 1949 | |
| 1950 static void | |
| 1951 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
| 1952 struct frame *f; | |
| 1953 { | |
| 1954 struct dim ch_dim; | |
| 1955 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
| 1956 int pool_changed_p; | |
| 1957 int window_change_flags; | |
| 1958 int top_window_y; | |
| 1959 | |
| 1960 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
| 1961 return; | |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
| 1964 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
| 1965 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
| 1966 | |
| 1967 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
| 1968 | |
| 1969 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
| 1970 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
| 1971 { | |
| 1972 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
| 1973 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
| 1974 } | |
| 1975 | |
| 1976 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
| 1977 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
| 1978 { | |
| 1979 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
| 1980 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
| 1981 } | |
| 1982 | |
| 1983 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
| 1984 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
| 1985 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
| 1986 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
| 1987 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
| 1988 matrix. */ | |
| 1989 window_change_flags = 0; | |
| 1990 matrix_dim | |
| 1991 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
| 1992 0, top_window_y, | |
| 1993 ch_dim, 1, | |
| 1994 &window_change_flags); | |
| 1995 | |
| 1996 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
| 1997 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
| 1998 | |
| 1999 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
| 2000 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
| 2001 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
| 2002 | |
| 2003 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
| 2004 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
| 2005 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
| 2006 { | |
| 2007 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
| 2008 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
| 2009 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
| 2010 &window_change_flags); | |
| 2011 | |
| 2012 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
| 2013 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
| 2014 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
| 2015 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
| 2016 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
| 2017 | |
| 2018 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
| 2019 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
| 2020 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
| 2021 | |
| 2022 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
| 2023 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
| 2024 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
| 2025 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
| 2026 } | |
| 2027 } | |
| 2028 | |
| 2029 | |
| 2030 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
| 2031 window-based redisplay. */ | |
| 2032 | |
| 2033 static void | |
| 2034 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
| 2035 struct frame *f; | |
| 2036 { | |
| 2037 struct dim ch_dim; | |
| 2038 struct window *w; | |
| 2039 | |
| 2040 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
| 2041 | |
| 2042 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
| 2043 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
| 2044 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
| 2045 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
| 2046 #else | |
| 2047 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
| 2048 #endif | |
| 2049 | |
| 2050 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
| 2051 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
| 2052 ch_dim); | |
| 2053 | |
| 2054 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
| 2055 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
| 2056 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
| 2057 { | |
| 2058 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
| 2059 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
| 2060 { | |
| 2061 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
| 2062 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
| 2063 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
| 2064 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
| 2065 } | |
| 2066 else | |
| 2067 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
| 2068 | |
| 2069 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
| 2070 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
| 2071 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
| 2072 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
| 2073 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
| 2074 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
| 2075 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
| 2076 } | |
| 2077 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
| 2078 | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2079 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2080 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2081 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
| 25012 | 2082 { |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2083 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2084 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
| 25012 | 2085 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
| 2086 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
| 2087 } | |
| 2088 else | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2089 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
| 25012 | 2090 |
| 2091 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
| 2092 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2093 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
| 25012 | 2094 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
| 2095 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
| 2096 } | |
| 2097 | |
| 2098 | |
| 2099 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
| 2100 | |
| 2101 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
| 2102 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
| 2103 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
| 2104 | |
| 2105 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
| 2106 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
| 2107 | |
| 2108 static void | |
| 2109 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
| 2110 struct frame *f; | |
| 2111 { | |
| 2112 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
| 2113 | |
| 2114 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
| 2115 { | |
| 2116 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
| 2117 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
| 2118 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
| 2119 } | |
| 2120 else | |
| 2121 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
| 2122 } | |
| 2123 | |
| 2124 | |
| 2125 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
| 2126 | |
| 2127 static void | |
| 2128 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
| 2129 struct frame *f; | |
| 2130 { | |
| 2131 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
| 2132 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
| 2133 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
| 2134 } | |
| 2135 | |
| 2136 | |
| 2137 | |
| 2138 /********************************************************************** | |
| 2139 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
| 2140 **********************************************************************/ | |
| 2141 | |
| 2142 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
| 2143 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
| 2144 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
| 2145 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
| 2146 | |
| 2147 void | |
| 2148 free_glyphs (f) | |
| 2149 struct frame *f; | |
| 2150 { | |
| 2151 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
| 2152 { | |
| 2153 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; | |
| 2154 | |
| 2155 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
| 2156 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
| 2157 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
| 2158 | |
| 2159 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
| 2160 glyph matrices. */ | |
| 2161 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
| 2162 { | |
| 2163 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
| 2164 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
| 2165 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
| 2166 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
| 2167 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
| 2168 } | |
| 2169 | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2170 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2171 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
| 25012 | 2172 { |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2173 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
| 25012 | 2174 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
| 2175 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
| 2176 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2177 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
| 25012 | 2178 } |
| 2179 | |
| 2180 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
| 2181 case we are called a second time. */ | |
| 2182 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
| 2183 { | |
| 2184 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
| 2185 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
| 2186 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
| 2187 } | |
| 2188 | |
| 2189 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
| 2190 if (f->desired_pool) | |
| 2191 { | |
| 2192 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
| 2193 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
| 2194 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
| 314 | 2195 } |
| 2196 } | |
| 2197 } | |
| 2198 | |
| 25012 | 2199 |
| 2200 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
| 2201 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
| 2202 the same tree more than once. */ | |
| 2203 | |
| 2204 void | |
| 2205 free_window_matrices (w) | |
| 2206 struct window *w; | |
| 2207 { | |
| 2208 while (w) | |
| 2209 { | |
| 2210 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 2211 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
| 2212 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 2213 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
| 2214 else | |
| 2215 { | |
| 2216 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
| 2217 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
| 2218 W. */ | |
| 2219 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
| 2220 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
| 2221 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
| 2222 } | |
| 2223 | |
| 2224 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
| 2225 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
| 2226 } | |
| 2227 } | |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 | |
| 2230 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
| 2231 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
| 2232 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
| 2233 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
|
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2234 |
|
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2235 void |
| 25012 | 2236 check_glyph_memory () |
|
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2237 { |
| 25012 | 2238 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
| 2239 | |
| 2240 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
| 2241 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
| 2242 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
| 2243 | |
| 2244 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
| 2245 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
| 2246 abort (); | |
| 2247 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
| 2248 abort (); | |
| 2249 } | |
| 2250 | |
| 2251 | |
| 2252 | |
| 2253 /********************************************************************** | |
| 2254 Building a Frame Matrix | |
| 2255 **********************************************************************/ | |
| 2256 | |
| 2257 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
| 2258 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
| 2259 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
| 2260 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
| 2261 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
| 2262 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
| 2263 window matrices in this section. | |
| 2264 | |
| 2265 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
| 2266 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
| 2267 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
| 2268 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
| 2269 | |
| 2270 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
| 2271 | desired | desired | | |
| 2272 | | | | |
| 2273 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
| 2274 | current | | |
| 2275 | | | |
| 2276 +----------------------------------+ | |
| 2277 | |
| 2278 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
| 2279 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
| 2280 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
| 2281 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
| 2282 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
| 2283 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
| 2284 | |
| 2285 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
| 2286 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
| 2287 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
| 2288 enabled. | |
| 2289 | |
| 2290 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
| 2291 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
| 2292 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
| 2293 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
| 2294 | |
| 2295 This problem is solved like this: | |
| 2296 | |
| 2297 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
| 2298 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
| 2299 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
| 2300 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
| 2301 automatically. | |
| 2302 | |
| 2303 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
| 2304 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
| 2305 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
| 2306 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
| 2307 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
| 2308 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
| 2309 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
| 2310 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
| 2311 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
| 2312 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
| 2313 | |
| 2314 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
| 2315 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
| 2316 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
| 2317 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
| 2318 | |
| 2319 static void | |
| 2320 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
| 2321 struct frame *f; | |
| 2322 { | |
|
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2323 int i; |
|
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2324 |
| 25012 | 2325 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
| 2326 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
| 2327 | |
| 2328 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
| 2329 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
| 2330 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
| 2331 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
| 2332 | |
| 2333 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
| 2334 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
| 2335 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
| 2336 } | |
| 2337 | |
| 2338 | |
| 2339 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
| 2340 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
| 2341 | |
| 2342 static void | |
| 2343 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
| 2344 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 2345 struct window *w; | |
| 2346 { | |
| 2347 while (w) | |
|
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2348 { |
| 25012 | 2349 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
| 2350 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
| 2351 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 2352 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
| 2353 else | |
| 2354 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
| 2355 | |
| 2356 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
|
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2357 } |
|
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2358 } |
|
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2359 |
| 25012 | 2360 |
| 2361 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
| 2362 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
| 2363 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
| 2364 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
| 2365 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
| 2366 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
| 2367 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
| 2368 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
| 2369 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
| 2370 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
| 2371 | |
| 2372 static void | |
| 2373 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
| 2374 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
|
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2375 struct window *w; |
|
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2376 { |
| 25012 | 2377 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
| 2378 int window_y, frame_y; | |
| 2379 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
| 2380 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
| 2381 | |
| 2382 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
| 2383 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
| 2384 { | |
| 2385 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
| 2386 | |
| 2387 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
| 2388 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
| 2389 { | |
| 2390 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
| 2391 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
| 2392 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
| 2393 : '|'); | |
| 2394 } | |
| 2395 } | |
| 2396 else | |
| 2397 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
| 2398 | |
| 2399 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
| 2400 frame matrix. */ | |
| 2401 window_y = 0; | |
| 2402 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
| 2403 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
|
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2404 { |
| 25012 | 2405 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
| 2406 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
| 2407 | |
| 2408 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
| 2409 window row. */ | |
| 2410 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
| 2411 | |
| 2412 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
| 2413 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
| 2414 | |
| 2415 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
|
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2416 { |
| 25012 | 2417 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
| 2418 row to frame row. */ | |
| 2419 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
| 2420 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
| 2421 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
| 2422 } | |
| 2423 else | |
| 2424 { | |
| 2425 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
| 2426 | |
| 2427 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
| 2428 windows. */ | |
| 2429 if (right_border_glyph) | |
| 2430 { | |
| 2431 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
| 2432 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
| 2433 } | |
| 2434 | |
| 2435 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that | |
| 2436 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
| 2437 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
| 2438 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
| 2439 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
| 2440 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
| 2441 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
|
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2442 { |
| 25012 | 2443 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
| 2444 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
| 2445 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
| 2446 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
| 2447 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
| 2448 | |
| 2449 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
| 2450 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
| 2451 | |
| 2452 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
| 2453 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
|
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2454 } |
| 25012 | 2455 |
| 2456 /* Now, we are sure that window row window_y is a slice of | |
| 2457 the frame row frame_y. But, lets check that assumption. */ | |
| 2458 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); | |
| 2459 | |
| 2460 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because | |
| 2461 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
|
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2462 |
|
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2463 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
|
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2464 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
|
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2465 #endif |
| 25012 | 2466 } |
| 2467 | |
| 2468 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
| 2469 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
| 2470 can be done simply. */ | |
| 2471 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 2472 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
| 2473 | |
| 2474 /* Or in flags. */ | |
| 2475 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
| 2476 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
| 2477 | |
| 2478 /* Next row. */ | |
| 2479 ++window_y; | |
| 2480 ++frame_y; | |
| 2481 } | |
| 2482 } | |
| 2483 | |
| 2484 | |
| 2485 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
| 2486 | |
| 2487 Each row has the form: | |
| 2488 | |
| 2489 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
| 2490 | left | text | right | | |
| 2491 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
| 2492 | |
| 2493 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
| 2494 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
| 2495 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
| 2496 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
| 2497 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
| 2498 | |
| 2499 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
| 2500 | |
| 2501 static void | |
| 2502 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
| 2503 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 2504 { | |
| 2505 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
| 2506 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
| 2507 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
| 2508 } | |
| 2509 | |
| 2510 | |
| 2511 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
| 2512 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
| 2513 | |
| 2514 static void | |
| 2515 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
| 2516 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 2517 int area; | |
| 2518 { | |
| 2519 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
| 2520 { | |
| 2521 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
| 2522 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
| 2523 | |
| 2524 while (text < end) | |
| 2525 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
| 2526 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
| 2527 } | |
| 2528 } | |
| 2529 | |
| 2530 | |
| 2531 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
| 2532 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
| 2533 | |
| 2534 static void | |
| 2535 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
| 2536 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 2537 int upto; | |
| 2538 { | |
| 2539 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 2540 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 2541 | |
| 2542 while (i < upto) | |
| 2543 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
| 2544 | |
| 2545 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
| 2546 } | |
| 2547 | |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 | |
| 2550 /********************************************************************** | |
| 2551 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
| 2552 **********************************************************************/ | |
| 2553 | |
| 2554 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
| 2555 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
| 2556 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
| 2557 | |
| 2558 static INLINE void | |
| 2559 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
| 2560 struct frame *f; | |
| 2561 { | |
| 2562 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
| 2563 } | |
| 2564 | |
| 2565 | |
| 2566 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
| 2567 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
| 2568 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
| 2569 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
| 2570 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
| 2571 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
| 2572 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
| 2573 | |
| 2574 static INLINE void | |
| 2575 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
| 2576 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
| 2577 int row; | |
| 2578 { | |
| 2579 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
| 2580 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
| 2581 | |
| 2582 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
| 2583 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
| 2584 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
| 2585 | |
| 2586 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
| 2587 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
| 2588 | |
| 2589 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
| 2590 for window matrices. */ | |
| 2591 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
| 2592 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
| 2593 } | |
| 2594 | |
| 2595 | |
| 2596 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
| 2597 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
| 2598 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
| 2599 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
| 2600 | |
| 2601 static void | |
| 2602 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
| 2603 struct window *w; | |
| 2604 int frame_row; | |
| 2605 { | |
| 2606 while (w) | |
| 2607 { | |
| 2608 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 2609 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
| 2610 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 2611 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
| 2612 else | |
| 2613 { | |
| 2614 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
| 2615 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
| 2616 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
| 2617 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
| 2618 | |
| 2619 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
| 2620 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
| 2621 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
|
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2622 { |
| 25012 | 2623 struct glyph_row *current_row |
| 2624 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
| 2625 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
| 2626 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
|
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2627 |
|
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2628 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
|
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2629 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
|
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2630 else |
|
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2631 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
| 25012 | 2632 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
|
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2633 } |
|
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2634 } |
| 25012 | 2635 |
| 2636 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
|
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2637 } |
|
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2638 } |
| 25012 | 2639 |
| 2640 | |
| 2641 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
| 2642 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
| 2643 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
| 2644 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
| 2645 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
| 2646 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
| 2647 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
| 2648 | |
| 2649 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
| 2650 | |
| 2651 void | |
| 2652 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
| 2653 retained_p) | |
| 2654 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
| 2655 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
| 2656 int *copy_from; | |
| 2657 char *retained_p; | |
| 2658 { | |
| 2659 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
| 2660 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
| 2661 | |
| 2662 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
| 2663 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
| 2664 | |
| 2665 int i; | |
| 2666 | |
| 2667 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
| 2668 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
| 2669 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
| 2670 | |
| 2671 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
| 2672 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
| 2673 { | |
| 2674 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
| 2675 | |
| 2676 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
| 2677 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
| 2678 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
| 2679 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
| 2680 | |
| 2681 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
| 2682 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
| 2683 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
| 2684 } | |
| 2685 | |
| 2686 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
| 2687 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
| 2688 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
| 2689 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
| 2690 } | |
| 2691 | |
| 2692 | |
| 2693 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after | |
| 2694 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
| 2695 | |
| 2696 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
| 2697 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
| 2698 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
| 2699 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
| 2700 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
| 2701 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
| 2702 which is empty. */ | |
| 2703 | |
| 2704 static void | |
| 2705 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
| 2706 struct window *w; | |
| 2707 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
| 2708 int *copy_from; | |
| 2709 char *retained_p; | |
| 2710 { | |
| 2711 while (w) | |
| 2712 { | |
| 2713 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 2714 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
| 2715 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
| 2716 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 2717 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
| 2718 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
| 2719 else | |
| 2720 { | |
| 2721 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
| 2722 matrix m. */ | |
| 2723 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
| 2724 | |
| 2725 int i; | |
| 2726 | |
| 2727 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
| 2728 | |
| 2729 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
| 2730 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
| 2731 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
| 2734 { | |
| 2735 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
| 2736 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
| 2737 | |
| 2738 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
| 2739 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
| 2740 | |
| 2741 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
| 2742 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
| 2743 | |
| 2744 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
| 2745 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
| 2748 int from_inside_window_p | |
| 2749 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
| 2750 | |
| 2751 if (from_inside_window_p) | |
| 2752 { | |
| 2753 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
| 2754 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ | |
| 2755 int to_inside_window_p | |
| 2756 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; | |
| 2757 #endif | |
| 2758 | |
| 2759 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
| 2760 int enabled_before_p; | |
| 2761 | |
| 2762 /* If not both lines inside the window, we have a | |
| 2763 serious problem. */ | |
| 2764 xassert (to_inside_window_p); | |
| 2765 | |
| 2766 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
| 2767 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
| 2768 that. */ | |
| 2769 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
| 2770 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
| 2771 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
| 2772 | |
| 2773 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
| 2774 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
| 2775 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
| 2776 } | |
| 2777 } | |
| 2778 | |
| 2779 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
| 2780 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
| 2781 } | |
| 2782 | |
| 2783 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
| 2784 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
| 2785 } | |
| 2786 } | |
| 2787 | |
| 2788 | |
| 2789 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
| 2790 | |
| 2791 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
| 2792 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
| 2793 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
| 2794 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
| 2795 glyph pointers. */ | |
| 314 | 2796 |
| 21514 | 2797 void |
| 25012 | 2798 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
| 314 | 2799 struct window *w; |
| 2800 { | |
| 25012 | 2801 while (w) |
| 2802 { | |
| 2803 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 2804 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
| 2805 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 2806 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
| 2807 else | |
| 2808 { | |
| 2809 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
| 2810 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
| 2811 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
| 2812 } | |
| 2813 | |
| 2814 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
| 2815 } | |
| 2816 } | |
| 2817 | |
| 2818 | |
| 2819 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
| 2820 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
| 2821 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
| 2822 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
| 2823 | |
| 2824 static void | |
| 2825 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
| 2826 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
| 2827 { | |
| 2828 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
| 2829 int i = 0; | |
| 2830 | |
| 2831 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
| 2832 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
| 2833 | |
| 2834 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
| 2835 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
| 2836 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
| 2837 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
| 2838 { | |
| 2839 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
| 2840 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
| 2841 abort (); | |
| 2842 ++i, ++j; | |
| 2843 } | |
| 2844 } | |
| 2845 | |
| 2846 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
| 2847 | |
| 2848 | |
| 2849 | |
| 2850 /********************************************************************** | |
| 2851 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
| 2852 **********************************************************************/ | |
| 2853 | |
| 2854 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
| 2855 | |
| 2856 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
| 2857 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
| 2858 | |
| 2859 static int | |
| 2860 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
| 2861 struct window *w; | |
| 2862 int vpos; | |
| 2863 { | |
| 2864 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
| 2865 | |
| 2866 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
| 2867 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
| 2868 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
| 2869 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
| 2870 return vpos; | |
| 2871 } | |
| 2872 | |
| 2873 | |
| 2874 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
| 2875 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
| 2876 | |
| 2877 static int | |
| 2878 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
| 2879 struct window *w; | |
| 2880 int hpos; | |
| 2881 { | |
| 2882 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
| 2883 | |
| 2884 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
| 2885 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
| 2886 return hpos; | |
| 314 | 2887 } |
| 25012 | 2888 |
| 2889 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
| 2890 | |
| 2891 | |
| 314 | 2892 |
| 25012 | 2893 /********************************************************************** |
| 2894 Redrawing Frames | |
| 2895 **********************************************************************/ | |
| 2896 | |
| 2897 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
| 2898 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
| 2899 (frame) | |
| 2900 Lisp_Object frame; | |
| 2901 { | |
| 2902 struct frame *f; | |
| 2903 | |
| 2904 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
| 2905 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
| 2906 | |
| 2907 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
| 2908 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
| 2909 called so early here). */ | |
| 2910 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
| 2911 return Qnil; | |
| 2912 | |
| 2913 update_begin (f); | |
| 2914 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
| 2915 set_terminal_modes (); | |
| 2916 clear_frame (); | |
| 2917 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
| 2918 update_end (f); | |
| 2919 fflush (stdout); | |
| 2920 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
| 2921 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
| 2922 its redisplay done. */ | |
| 2923 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
| 2924 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
| 2925 f->garbaged = 0; | |
| 2926 return Qnil; | |
| 2927 } | |
| 2928 | |
| 2929 | |
| 2930 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
| 2931 function redraw-frame. */ | |
| 2932 | |
| 2933 void | |
| 2934 redraw_frame (f) | |
| 2935 struct frame *f; | |
| 2936 { | |
| 2937 Lisp_Object frame; | |
| 2938 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
| 2939 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
| 2940 } | |
| 2941 | |
| 2942 | |
| 2943 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
| 2944 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
| 2945 () | |
| 2946 { | |
| 2947 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
| 2948 | |
| 2949 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
| 2950 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
| 2951 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
| 2952 | |
| 2953 return Qnil; | |
| 2954 } | |
| 2955 | |
| 2956 | |
| 2957 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
| 2958 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
| 2959 | |
| 2960 void | |
| 2961 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
| 2962 { | |
| 2963 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
| 2964 | |
| 2965 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
| 2966 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
| 2967 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
| 2968 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
| 2969 } | |
| 2970 | |
| 2971 | |
| 2972 | |
| 2973 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 2974 Direct Operations | |
| 2975 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 2976 | |
| 2977 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
| 2978 | |
| 2979 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
| 2980 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
| 2981 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
| 2982 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
| 2983 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
| 2984 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
| 2985 | |
| 2986 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
| 2987 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
| 2988 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
| 2989 for details where this function is called. */ | |
| 314 | 2990 |
| 2991 int | |
| 2992 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
| 2993 int g; | |
| 2994 { | |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
2995 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
| 25012 | 2996 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
| 2997 struct it it, it2; | |
| 2998 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
| 2999 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
| 3000 int n; | |
| 3001 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
| 3002 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
| 3003 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
| 3004 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
| 3005 int added_width; | |
| 3006 struct text_pos pos; | |
| 3007 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
| 3008 | |
| 3009 /* Not done directly. */ | |
| 3010 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
| 3011 | |
| 3012 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
| 3013 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
| 3014 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
| 3015 || fonts_changed_p | |
| 3016 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
| 3017 || face_change_count | |
| 3018 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
| 314 | 3019 || !display_completed |
| 25012 | 3020 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
| 314 | 3021 || buffer_shared > 1 |
| 25012 | 3022 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3023 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
| 25012 | 3024 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
| 3025 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
| 3026 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
| 3027 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
| 3028 || (overwrite_p | |
| 3029 && PT != ZV | |
| 3030 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
| 3031 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
| 3032 || g == '\t' | |
| 3033 || g == '\n' | |
| 3034 || g == '\r' | |
| 3035 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
| 3036 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3037 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3038 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3039 lines would change. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3040 (glyph_row->continued_p |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3041 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3042 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3043 have to be redisplayed. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3044 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3045 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
| 25012 | 3046 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
| 3047 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
| 3048 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
| 3049 return 0; | |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
| 3052 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
| 3053 position. */ | |
| 3054 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
| 3055 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
| 3056 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos); | |
| 3057 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, | |
| 3058 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
| 3059 | |
| 3060 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
| 3061 | |
| 3062 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
| 3063 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
| 3064 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
|
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3065 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
| 25012 | 3066 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
| 3067 { | |
| 3068 struct glyph *last; | |
| 3069 | |
| 3070 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
| 3071 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
| 3072 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
| 3073 && last->u.ch.code == ' ')) | |
| 3074 return 0; | |
| 3075 } | |
| 3076 | |
| 3077 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
| 3078 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
| 3079 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
| 3080 return 0; | |
| 3081 | |
| 3082 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
| 3083 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
| 3084 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
| 3085 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
| 3086 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
| 3087 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
| 3088 | |
| 3089 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
| 3090 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
| 3091 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
| 3092 combination of both. */ | |
| 3093 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
| 3094 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
| 3095 { | |
| 3096 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
| 3097 | |
| 3098 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
| 3099 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
| 3100 return 0; | |
| 3101 | |
| 3102 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
| 3103 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
| 3104 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
| 3105 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3106 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3107 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
| 25012 | 3108 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
| 3109 return 0; | |
| 3110 | |
| 3111 delta += 1; | |
| 3112 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
| 3113 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
| 3114 } | |
| 3115 | |
| 3116 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
| 3117 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
| 3118 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
| 3119 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
| 314 | 3120 return 0; |
| 3121 | |
| 25012 | 3122 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
| 3123 it2 = it; | |
| 3124 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
| 3125 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
| 3126 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
| 3127 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
| 3128 { | |
| 3129 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
| 3130 return 0; | |
| 3131 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
| 3132 } | |
| 3133 | |
| 3134 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
| 3135 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 3136 | |
| 3137 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
| 3138 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
| 3139 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 3140 | |
| 3141 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
| 3142 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
| 3143 safe_bcopy (glyphs, glyphs + n, (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); | |
| 3144 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); | |
| 3145 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
| 3146 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
| 3147 | |
| 3148 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
| 3149 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 3150 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 3151 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
| 3152 while (glyph < end) | |
| 3153 { | |
| 3154 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
| 3155 ++glyph; | |
| 3156 } | |
| 3157 | |
| 3158 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
| 3159 inserted ones. */ | |
| 3160 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
| 3161 if (glyph->charpos > 0) | |
| 3162 glyph->charpos += delta; | |
| 3163 | |
| 3164 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
| 3165 { | |
| 3166 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
| 3167 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
| 3168 } | |
| 3169 | |
| 3170 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
| 3171 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (w->current_matrix, | |
| 3172 w->cursor.vpos + 1, | |
| 3173 w->current_matrix->nrows, | |
| 3174 delta, delta_bytes); | |
| 3175 | |
| 3176 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
| 3177 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
| 3178 | |
|
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3179 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
| 25012 | 3180 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
| 3181 | |
| 3182 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
| 3183 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
| 3184 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
| 3185 and updated_row. */ | |
| 3186 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
| 3187 update_begin (f); | |
| 3188 if (rif) | |
| 3189 { | |
| 3190 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
| 3191 | |
| 3192 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
| 3193 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
| 3194 else | |
| 3195 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
| 3196 } | |
| 3197 else | |
| 3198 { | |
| 3199 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
| 3200 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
| 3201 else | |
| 3202 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
| 3203 } | |
| 3204 | |
| 3205 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
| 3206 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
| 3207 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
| 3208 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
| 3209 | |
| 3210 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
| 3211 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
| 3212 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
| 3213 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
| 3214 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
| 3215 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
| 3216 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
| 3217 else | |
| 3218 { | |
| 3219 int x, y; | |
| 3220 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
| 3221 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
| 3222 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
| 3223 : 0)); | |
| 3224 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
| 3225 cursor_to (y, x); | |
| 3226 } | |
| 3227 | |
| 3228 if (rif) | |
| 3229 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
| 3230 update_end (f); | |
| 3231 updated_row = NULL; | |
| 3232 fflush (stdout); | |
| 3233 | |
| 3234 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
| 3235 | |
|
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3236 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
|
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3237 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
|
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3238 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
| 25012 | 3239 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
|
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3240 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
|
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3241 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
| 314 | 3242 |
| 25012 | 3243 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
| 314 | 3244 return 1; |
| 3245 } | |
| 3246 | |
| 25012 | 3247 |
| 3248 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
| 3249 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
| 3250 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
| 3251 | |
| 314 | 3252 int |
| 3253 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
| 3254 int n; | |
| 3255 { | |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3256 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
| 25012 | 3257 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
| 3258 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 3259 | |
| 3260 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
| 3261 if (face_change_count) | |
|
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3262 return 0; |
| 25012 | 3263 |
| 3264 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
| 3265 displaying a message. */ | |
| 3266 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
| 3267 return 0; | |
| 3268 | |
| 3269 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
| 3270 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
| 314 | 3271 return 0; |
|
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3272 |
|
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3273 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
|
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3274 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
|
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3275 return 0; |
|
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3276 |
|
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3277 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
|
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3278 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
|
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3279 return 0; |
|
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3280 |
| 25012 | 3281 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
| 3282 | |
| 3283 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
| 3284 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
|
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3285 return 0; |
|
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3286 |
| 25012 | 3287 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
| 3288 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
|
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3289 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
| 25012 | 3290 |
| 3291 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
| 3292 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
| 3293 | |
| 3294 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
| 3295 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
| 3296 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
| 3297 else | |
| 3298 { | |
| 3299 int x, y; | |
| 3300 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
| 3301 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
| 3302 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
| 3303 : 0)); | |
| 3304 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
| 3305 cursor_to (y, x); | |
| 3306 } | |
| 3307 | |
| 314 | 3308 fflush (stdout); |
| 25012 | 3309 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
| 314 | 3310 return 1; |
| 3311 } | |
| 25012 | 3312 |
| 3313 | |
| 314 | 3314 |
| 25012 | 3315 /*********************************************************************** |
| 3316 Frame Update | |
| 3317 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 3318 | |
| 3319 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
| 3320 | |
| 3321 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
| 3322 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
| 3323 scrolling. | |
| 3324 | |
| 3325 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
| 314 | 3326 |
| 3327 int | |
| 25012 | 3328 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
| 3329 struct frame *f; | |
| 3330 int force_p; | |
| 3331 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
| 3332 { | |
| 3333 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
| 3334 int paused_p; | |
| 3335 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
| 3336 | |
| 3337 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
| 3338 { | |
| 3339 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
| 3340 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
| 3341 | |
| 3342 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
| 3343 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
| 3344 | |
| 3345 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
| 3346 when pending input is detected. */ | |
| 3347 update_begin (f); | |
| 3348 | |
| 3349 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
| 3350 support. */ | |
| 3351 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
| 3352 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
| 3353 | |
| 3354 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3355 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
| 25012 | 3356 { |
| 3357 Lisp_Object tem; | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3358 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
| 25012 | 3359 |
| 3360 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
| 3361 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
| 3362 { | |
| 3363 update_window (w, 1); | |
| 3364 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
| 3365 | |
| 3366 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
| 3367 reuse strings. */ | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3368 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3369 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3370 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3371 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
| 25012 | 3372 |
| 3373 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
| 3374 reuse vectors. */ | |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3375 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3376 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3377 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
| 25012 | 3378 } |
| 3379 } | |
| 3380 | |
| 3381 | |
| 3382 /* Update windows. */ | |
| 3383 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
| 3384 update_end (f); | |
| 3385 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
| 3386 | |
| 3387 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
| 3388 #if 0 | |
| 3389 rif->flush_display (f); | |
| 3390 #endif | |
| 3391 } | |
| 3392 else | |
| 3393 { | |
| 3394 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
| 3395 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
| 3396 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
| 3397 | |
| 3398 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
| 3399 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
| 3400 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
| 3401 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
| 3402 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
| 3403 | |
| 3404 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
| 3405 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
| 3406 | |
| 3407 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
| 3408 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
| 3409 } | |
| 3410 | |
| 3411 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
| 3412 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
| 3413 return paused_p; | |
| 3414 } | |
| 3415 | |
| 3416 | |
| 3417 | |
| 3418 /************************************************************************ | |
| 3419 Window-based updates | |
| 3420 ************************************************************************/ | |
| 3421 | |
| 3422 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
| 3423 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
| 3424 | |
| 3425 static int | |
| 3426 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
| 3427 struct window *w; | |
| 3428 int force_p; | |
| 3429 { | |
| 3430 int paused_p = 0; | |
| 3431 | |
| 3432 while (w && !paused_p) | |
| 3433 { | |
| 3434 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 3435 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
| 3436 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 3437 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
| 3438 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
| 3439 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
| 3440 | |
| 3441 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
| 3442 } | |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 return paused_p; | |
| 3445 } | |
| 3446 | |
| 3447 | |
| 3448 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
| 3449 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
| 3450 | |
| 3451 void | |
| 3452 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
| 3453 struct window *w; | |
| 3454 int force_p; | |
| 3455 { | |
| 3456 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
| 3457 { | |
| 3458 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
| 3459 | |
| 3460 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
| 3461 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
| 3462 | |
| 3463 /* Update W. */ | |
| 3464 update_begin (f); | |
| 3465 update_window (w, force_p); | |
| 3466 update_end (f); | |
| 3467 | |
| 3468 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
| 3469 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
| 3470 } | |
| 3471 } | |
| 3472 | |
| 3473 | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3474 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3475 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3476 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3477 static void |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3478 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3479 struct window *w; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3480 int yb; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3481 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3482 int i, bottom_y; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3483 struct glyph_row *row; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3484 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3485 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3486 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3487 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3488 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3489 current rows is 0. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3490 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3491 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3492 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3493 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3494 if (!row->enabled_p) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3495 break; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3496 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3497 continue; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3498 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3499 if (row->overlapped_p) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3500 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3501 enum glyph_row_area area; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3502 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3503 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3504 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3505 updated_row = row; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3506 updated_area = area; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3507 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3508 if (row->used[area]) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3509 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3510 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3511 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3512 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3513 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3514 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3515 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3516 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3517 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3518 break; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3519 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3520 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3521 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3522 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3523 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3524 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3525 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3526 static void |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3527 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3528 struct window *w; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3529 int yb; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3530 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3531 int i, bottom_y; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3532 struct glyph_row *row; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3533 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3534 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3535 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3536 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3537 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3538 if (!row->enabled_p) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3539 break; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3540 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3541 continue; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3542 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3543 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3544 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3545 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3546 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3547 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3548 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3549 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3550 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3551 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3552 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3553 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3554 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3555 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3556 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3557 display. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3558 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3559 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3560 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3561 > row->height - row->ascent) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3562 && bottom_y < yb) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3563 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3564 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3565 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3566 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3567 break; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3568 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3569 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3570 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3571 |
| 25012 | 3572 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
| 3573 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
| 3574 | |
| 3575 static int | |
| 3576 update_window (w, force_p) | |
| 3577 struct window *w; | |
| 3578 int force_p; | |
| 3579 { | |
| 3580 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
| 3581 int paused_p; | |
| 3582 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
| 3583 extern int input_pending; | |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3584 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3585 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
| 25012 | 3586 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3587 #endif |
| 25012 | 3588 |
| 3589 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
| 3590 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
| 3591 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
| 3592 | |
| 3593 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
| 3594 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
| 3595 force_p = 1; | |
| 3596 else | |
| 3597 detect_input_pending (); | |
| 3598 | |
| 3599 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
| 3600 the update. */ | |
| 3601 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
| 3602 { | |
| 3603 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
| 3604 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
| 25546 | 3605 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3606 int yb, changed_p = 0; |
| 25012 | 3607 |
| 3608 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
| 3609 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
| 3610 | |
| 3611 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
| 3612 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
| 3613 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
| 3614 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
| 3615 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
| 25546 | 3616 header_line_row = row++; |
| 25012 | 3617 |
| 3618 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
| 3619 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
| 3620 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
| 3621 { | |
| 3622 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
| 3623 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
| 3624 desired_matrix)); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3625 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3626 } |
| 3627 | |
| 3628 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
| 3629 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
| 3630 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
| 3631 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
| 3632 ++row; | |
| 3633 | |
| 3634 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
| 3635 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
| 3636 { | |
| 25546 | 3637 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
| 25012 | 3638 if (rc < 0) |
| 3639 { | |
| 3640 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
| 3641 paused_p = 0; | |
| 3642 goto set_cursor; | |
| 3643 } | |
| 3644 else if (rc > 0) | |
| 3645 force_p = 1; | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3646 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3647 } |
| 3648 | |
| 3649 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
| 3650 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
| 3651 that can be scrolled. */ | |
| 25546 | 3652 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
| 25012 | 3653 { |
| 25546 | 3654 header_line_row->y = 0; |
| 25012 | 3655 update_window_line (w, 0); |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3656 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3657 } |
| 3658 | |
| 3659 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
| 3660 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
| 3661 if (row->enabled_p | |
| 3662 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
| 3663 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
| 3664 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
| 3665 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
| 3666 { | |
| 3667 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
| 3668 int i; | |
| 3669 | |
| 3670 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
| 3671 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
| 3672 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
| 3673 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
| 3674 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
| 3675 detect_input_pending (); | |
| 3676 | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos); |
| 25012 | 3678 |
| 3679 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
| 3680 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
| 3681 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
| 3682 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
| 3683 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
| 3684 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
| 3685 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
| 3686 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
| 3687 in the first redisplay. */ | |
| 3688 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
| 3689 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
| 3690 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
| 3691 } | |
| 3692 | |
| 3693 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
| 3694 paused_p = row < end; | |
| 3695 | |
| 3696 set_cursor: | |
| 3697 | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3698 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3699 if (rif->fix_overlapping_area |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3700 && !w->pseudo_window_p |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 && changed_p |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3702 && !paused_p) |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3703 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3704 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3705 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3706 } |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3707 |
| 25012 | 3708 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
| 3709 { | |
| 3710 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
| 3711 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
| 3712 | |
| 3713 #if 0 | |
| 3714 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
| 3715 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
| 3716 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
| 3717 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
| 3718 #endif | |
| 3719 } | |
| 3720 | |
| 3721 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
| 3722 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
| 3723 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
| 3724 #endif | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3725 |
| 25012 | 3726 /* End of update of window W. */ |
| 3727 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3728 |
| 25012 | 3729 } |
| 3730 else | |
| 3731 paused_p = 1; | |
| 3732 | |
| 3733 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3734 |
| 25012 | 3735 return paused_p; |
| 3736 } | |
| 3737 | |
| 3738 | |
| 3739 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
| 3740 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
| 3741 | |
| 3742 static void | |
| 3743 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
| 3744 struct window *w; | |
| 3745 int area, vpos; | |
| 3746 { | |
| 3747 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
| 3748 | |
| 3749 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
| 3750 will be relative to. */ | |
| 3751 updated_area = area; | |
| 3752 | |
| 3753 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
| 3754 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
| 3755 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
| 3756 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
| 3757 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
| 3758 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
| 3759 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
| 3760 } | |
| 3761 | |
| 3762 | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3763 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3764 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3765 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3766 static int |
| 25012 | 3767 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
| 3768 struct window *w; | |
| 3769 int vpos; | |
| 314 | 3770 { |
| 25012 | 3771 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
| 3772 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3773 int changed_p = 0; |
| 25012 | 3774 |
| 3775 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
| 3776 will be relative to. */ | |
| 3777 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
| 3778 | |
| 3779 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
| 3780 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
| 3781 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
| 3782 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
| 3783 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3784 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3785 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
| 25012 | 3786 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3787 || current_row->overlapped_p |
| 25012 | 3788 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
| 3789 { | |
| 3790 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
| 3791 | |
| 3792 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
| 3793 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
| 3794 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
| 3795 | |
| 3796 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
| 3797 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3798 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3799 } |
| 3800 else | |
| 3801 { | |
| 3802 int stop, i, x; | |
| 3803 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 3804 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 3805 | |
| 3806 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
| 3807 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
| 3808 extension actually takes place. */ | |
| 3809 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 3810 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
| 3811 ? 1 : 0)); | |
| 3812 | |
| 3813 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
| 3814 i = 0; | |
| 3815 x = desired_row->x; | |
| 3816 | |
| 3817 while (i < stop) | |
| 3818 { | |
| 3819 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
| 3820 don't have to be written. */ | |
| 3821 while (i < stop | |
| 3822 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
| 3823 { | |
| 3824 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
| 3825 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
| 3826 } | |
| 3827 | |
| 3828 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
| 3829 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
| 3830 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
| 3831 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
| 3832 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
| 3833 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
| 3834 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
| 3835 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
| 3836 && i > 0 | |
| 3837 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
| 3838 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
| 3839 { | |
| 3840 int left, right; | |
| 3841 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
| 3842 &left, &right); | |
| 3843 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
| 3844 { | |
| 3845 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
| 3846 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
| 3847 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
| 3848 } | |
| 3849 } | |
| 3850 | |
| 3851 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
| 3852 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
| 3853 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
| 3854 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
| 3855 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
| 3856 { | |
| 3857 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
| 3858 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
| 3859 int current_x = x; | |
| 3860 | |
| 3861 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
| 3862 while (i < stop | |
| 3863 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
| 3864 && x == current_x) | |
| 3865 { | |
| 3866 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
| 3867 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
| 3868 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
| 3869 } | |
| 3870 | |
| 3871 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
| 3872 { | |
| 3873 i = start_hpos; | |
| 3874 x = start_x; | |
| 3875 desired_glyph = start; | |
| 3876 break; | |
| 3877 } | |
| 3878 | |
| 3879 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
| 3880 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3881 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3882 } |
| 3883 } | |
| 3884 | |
| 3885 /* Write the rest. */ | |
| 3886 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
| 3887 { | |
| 3888 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
| 3889 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3890 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3891 } |
| 3892 | |
| 3893 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
| 3894 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
| 3895 { | |
| 3896 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
| 3897 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
| 3898 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
| 3899 appropriately above. */ | |
| 3900 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
| 3901 } | |
| 3902 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
| 3903 { | |
| 3904 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
| 3905 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
| 3906 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
| 3907 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
| 3908 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3909 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3910 } |
| 3911 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
| 3912 { | |
| 3913 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
| 3914 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
| 3915 int x; | |
| 3916 | |
| 3917 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
| 3918 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
| 3919 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
| 3920 | |
| 3921 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
| 3922 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
| 3923 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
| 3924 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
| 3925 this way. */ | |
| 3926 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
| 3927 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
| 3928 { | |
| 3929 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
| 3930 x = -1; | |
| 3931 } | |
| 3932 else | |
| 3933 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
| 3934 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3935 changed_p = 1; |
| 25012 | 3936 } |
| 3937 } | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3938 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3939 return changed_p; |
| 25012 | 3940 } |
| 3941 | |
| 3942 | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3943 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3944 changed. */ |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3945 |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3946 static int |
| 25012 | 3947 update_window_line (w, vpos) |
| 3948 struct window *w; | |
| 3949 int vpos; | |
| 3950 { | |
| 3951 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
| 3952 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3953 int changed_p = 0; |
| 25012 | 3954 |
| 3955 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
| 3956 | |
| 3957 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
| 3958 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
| 3959 updated_row = desired_row; | |
| 3960 | |
| 3961 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
| 3962 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
| 3963 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3964 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3965 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3966 changed_p = 1; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3967 } |
| 25012 | 3968 |
| 3969 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3970 changed_p |= update_text_area (w, vpos); |
| 25012 | 3971 |
| 3972 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
| 3973 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
| 3974 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3975 { |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3976 changed_p = 1; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3977 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3978 } |
| 25012 | 3979 |
| 3980 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
| 3981 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
| 3982 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
| 3983 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
| 3984 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
| 3985 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
| 3986 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
| 3987 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
| 3988 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
| 3989 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
| 3990 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
| 3991 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
| 3992 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
| 3993 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
| 3994 | |
| 3995 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
| 3996 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
| 3997 updated_row = NULL; | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3998 return changed_p; |
| 25012 | 3999 } |
| 4000 | |
| 4001 | |
| 4002 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
| 4003 be called from update_window. */ | |
| 4004 | |
| 4005 static void | |
| 4006 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
| 4007 struct window *w; | |
| 4008 { | |
| 4009 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
| 4010 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
| 4011 | |
| 4012 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
| 4013 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
| 4014 | |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4015 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4016 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4017 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4018 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4019 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4020 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
| 25012 | 4021 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
| 4022 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
| 4023 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
| 4024 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
| 4025 { | |
| 4026 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
| 4027 | |
| 4028 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
| 4029 { | |
| 4030 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
| 4031 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
| 4032 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
| 4033 determine Y. */ | |
|
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4034 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4035 struct glyph *glyph; |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4036 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4037 |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4038 last_row = NULL; |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4039 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4040 row->enabled_p; |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4041 ++row) |
| 25012 | 4042 { |
|
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4043 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4044 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4045 last_row = row; |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4046 |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4047 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4048 break; |
| 25012 | 4049 } |
|
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4050 |
| 25012 | 4051 if (last_row) |
| 4052 { | |
|
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4053 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4054 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4055 |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4056 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
|
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4057 --last; |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4058 |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4059 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4060 { |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4061 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4062 ++hpos; |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4063 } |
|
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4064 |
| 25012 | 4065 cy = last_row->y; |
|
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4066 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
| 25012 | 4067 } |
| 4068 } | |
| 4069 } | |
| 4070 else | |
| 4071 { | |
| 4072 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
| 4073 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
| 4074 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
| 4075 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
| 4076 } | |
| 4077 | |
| 4078 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
| 4079 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
| 4080 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
| 4081 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
| 4082 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
| 4083 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
| 4084 } | |
| 4085 | |
| 4086 | |
| 4087 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. | |
| 25546 | 4088 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
| 25012 | 4089 |
| 4090 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
| 4091 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
| 4092 O(N) time. | |
| 4093 | |
| 4094 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
| 4095 | |
| 4096 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
| 4097 | |
| 4098 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
| 4099 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
| 4100 | |
| 4101 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
| 4102 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
| 4103 | |
| 4104 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
| 4105 forward and backward. | |
| 4106 | |
| 4107 Value is | |
| 4108 | |
| 4109 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
| 4110 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
| 4111 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
| 4112 | |
| 4113 static int | |
| 25546 | 4114 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
| 25012 | 4115 struct window *w; |
| 25546 | 4116 int header_line_p; |
| 25012 | 4117 { |
| 4118 struct symbol | |
| 4119 { | |
| 4120 /* Number of occurrences of this line in old and new matrix. */ | |
| 4121 short old_uses, new_uses; | |
| 4122 | |
| 4123 /* Vpos of line in new matrix. */ | |
| 4124 short new_line_number; | |
| 4125 | |
| 4126 /* The line itself. */ | |
| 4127 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 4128 | |
| 4129 /* Hash collision chain. */ | |
| 4130 struct symbol *next; | |
| 4131 }; | |
| 4132 | |
| 4133 int SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE = 101; | |
| 4134 struct symbol **table; | |
| 4135 struct symbol **old_line_syms, **new_line_syms; | |
| 4136 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; | |
| 4137 struct symbol *sym; | |
| 4138 struct run **runs; | |
| 4139 int nruns; | |
| 4140 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
| 4141 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
| 4142 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
| 4143 | |
| 4144 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
| 25546 | 4145 i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; |
| 25012 | 4146 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 |
| 4147 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
| 4148 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
| 4149 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb | |
| 4150 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb | |
| 4151 && row_equal_p (w, | |
| 4152 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
| 4153 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i))) | |
| 4154 { | |
| 4155 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
| 4156 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
| 4157 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
| 4158 ++i; | |
| 4159 } | |
| 4160 | |
| 4161 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
| 4162 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
| 4163 return -1; | |
| 4164 | |
| 4165 first_old = first_new = i; | |
| 4166 | |
| 4167 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
| 4168 desired matrix. */ | |
| 4169 i = first_new + 1; | |
| 4170 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
| 4171 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
| 4172 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
| 4173 ++i; | |
| 4174 | |
| 4175 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
| 4176 return 0; | |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 last_new = i; | |
| 4179 | |
| 4180 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
| 4181 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
| 4182 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
| 4183 disabled. */ | |
| 4184 i = first_old + 1; | |
| 4185 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
| 4186 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
| 4187 ++i; | |
| 4188 last_old = i; | |
| 4189 | |
| 4190 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
| 4191 i = last_new; | |
| 4192 j = last_old; | |
| 4193 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
| 4194 && j - 1 > first_old | |
| 4195 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
| 4196 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
| 4197 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
| 4198 && row_equal_p (w, | |
| 4199 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
| 4200 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1))) | |
| 4201 --i, --j; | |
| 4202 last_new = i; | |
| 4203 last_old = j; | |
| 4204 | |
| 4205 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
| 4206 if (last_new == first_new) | |
| 4207 return 0; | |
| 4208 | |
| 4209 /* Allocate a hash table in which all rows will be inserted. */ | |
| 4210 table = (struct symbol **) alloca (SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
| 4211 bzero (table, SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
| 4212 | |
| 4213 /* For each row in the current matrix, record the symbol belonging | |
| 4214 to the row in OLD_LINE_SYMS. */ | |
| 4215 old_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (current_matrix->nrows | |
| 4216 * sizeof *old_line_syms); | |
| 4217 new_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows | |
| 4218 * sizeof *new_line_syms); | |
| 4219 | |
| 4220 #define ADDSYM(ROW) \ | |
| 4221 do \ | |
| 4222 { \ | |
| 4223 struct glyph_row *row_ = (ROW); \ | |
| 4224 int i_ = row_->hash % SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE; \ | |
| 4225 sym = table[i_]; \ | |
| 4226 while (sym && !row_equal_p (w, sym->row, row_)) \ | |
| 4227 sym = sym->next; \ | |
| 4228 if (sym == NULL) \ | |
| 4229 { \ | |
| 4230 sym = (struct symbol *) alloca (sizeof *sym); \ | |
| 4231 sym->row = row_; \ | |
| 4232 sym->old_uses = sym->new_uses = 0; \ | |
| 4233 sym->next = table[i_]; \ | |
| 4234 table[i_] = sym; \ | |
| 4235 } \ | |
| 4236 } \ | |
| 4237 while (0) | |
| 4238 | |
| 4239 /* Add current rows to the symbol table. */ | |
| 4240 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) | |
| 4241 { | |
| 4242 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
| 4243 { | |
| 4244 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); | |
| 4245 old_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
| 4246 ++sym->old_uses; | |
| 4247 } | |
| 4248 else | |
| 4249 old_line_syms[i] = NULL; | |
| 4250 } | |
| 4251 | |
| 4252 /* Add desired rows to the symbol table. */ | |
| 4253 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
| 4254 { | |
| 4255 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
| 4256 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
| 4257 ++sym->new_uses; | |
| 4258 new_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
| 4259 sym->new_line_number = i; | |
| 4260 } | |
| 4261 | |
| 4262 #undef ADDSYM | |
| 4263 | |
| 4264 /* Record in runs which moves were found, ordered by pixel | |
| 4265 height of copied areas. */ | |
| 4266 nruns = 0; | |
| 4267 runs = (struct run **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows * sizeof *runs); | |
| 4268 | |
| 4269 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
| 4270 in both matrices. */ | |
| 4271 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
| 4272 if (old_line_syms[i] | |
| 4273 && old_line_syms[i]->old_uses == 1 | |
| 4274 && old_line_syms[i]->new_uses == 1) | |
| 4275 { | |
| 4276 int j, k; | |
| 4277 int new_line = old_line_syms[i]->new_line_number; | |
| 4278 struct run *run = (struct run *) alloca (sizeof *run); | |
| 4279 | |
| 4280 /* Record move. */ | |
| 4281 run->current_vpos = i; | |
| 4282 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
| 4283 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
| 4284 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
| 4285 run->nrows = 1; | |
| 4286 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
| 4287 | |
| 4288 /* Extend backward. */ | |
| 4289 j = i - 1; | |
| 4290 k = new_line - 1; | |
| 4291 while (j > first_old | |
| 4292 && k > first_new | |
| 4293 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
| 4294 { | |
| 4295 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
| 4296 --run->current_vpos; | |
| 4297 --run->desired_vpos; | |
| 4298 ++run->nrows; | |
| 4299 run->height += h; | |
| 4300 run->desired_y -= h; | |
| 4301 run->current_y -= h; | |
| 4302 --j, --k; | |
| 4303 } | |
| 4304 | |
| 4305 /* Extend forward. */ | |
| 4306 j = i + 1; | |
| 4307 k = new_line + 1; | |
| 4308 while (j < last_old | |
| 4309 && k < last_new | |
| 4310 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
| 4311 { | |
| 4312 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
| 4313 ++run->nrows; | |
| 4314 run->height += h; | |
| 4315 ++j, ++k; | |
| 4316 } | |
| 4317 | |
| 4318 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
| 4319 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
| 4320 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
| 4321 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
| 4322 case. */ | |
| 4323 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
| 4324 ; | |
| 4325 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
| 4326 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
| 4327 runs[j] = run; | |
| 4328 ++nruns; | |
| 4329 | |
| 4330 i += run->nrows; | |
| 4331 } | |
| 4332 else | |
| 4333 ++i; | |
| 4334 | |
| 4335 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
| 4336 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
| 4337 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
| 4338 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
| 4339 | |
| 4340 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
| 4341 | A | | B | | |
| 4342 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
| 4343 | B | | A | | |
| 4344 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
| 4345 | |
| 4346 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
| 4347 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
| 4348 | |
| 4349 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
| 4350 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
| 4351 { | |
| 4352 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
| 4353 | |
| 4354 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
| 4355 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
| 4356 { | |
| 4357 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
| 4358 | |
| 4359 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
| 4360 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
| 4361 { | |
| 4362 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
| 4365 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
| 4366 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
| 4367 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
| 4368 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
| 4369 p->nrows = 0; | |
| 4370 } | |
| 4371 } | |
| 4372 | |
| 4373 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
| 4374 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
| 4375 { | |
| 4376 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4377 int to_overlapped_p; |
|
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4378 |
| 25012 | 4379 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4380 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
| 25012 | 4381 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
| 4382 assign_row (to, from); | |
| 4383 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
|
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4384 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
| 25012 | 4385 } |
| 4386 } | |
| 4387 | |
| 4388 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ | |
| 4389 return 1; | |
| 4390 } | |
| 4391 | |
| 4392 | |
| 4393 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p TO ON_P for all windows WINDOW in the | |
| 4394 window tree rooted at W. */ | |
| 4395 | |
| 4396 void | |
| 4397 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) | |
| 4398 struct window *w; | |
| 4399 int on_p; | |
| 4400 { | |
| 4401 while (w) | |
| 4402 { | |
| 4403 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
| 4404 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); | |
| 4405 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
| 4406 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); | |
| 4407 else | |
| 4408 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; | |
| 4409 | |
| 4410 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
| 4411 } | |
| 4412 } | |
| 4413 | |
| 4414 | |
| 4415 | |
| 4416 /************************************************************************ | |
| 4417 Frame-Based Updates | |
| 4418 ************************************************************************/ | |
| 4419 | |
| 4420 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
| 4421 | |
| 4422 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
| 4423 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
| 4424 should not be tried. | |
| 4425 | |
| 4426 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
| 4427 | |
| 4428 static int | |
| 4429 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
| 4430 struct frame *f; | |
| 4431 int force_p; | |
| 4432 int inhibit_id_p; | |
| 4433 { | |
| 4434 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
| 4435 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
| 4436 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
| 4437 int i; | |
| 314 | 4438 int pause; |
| 4439 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
| 21514 | 4440 extern int input_pending; |
| 25012 | 4441 |
| 4442 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
| 314 | 4443 |
|
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4444 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
|
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4445 calculate_costs (f); |
|
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4446 |
|
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4447 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
|
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4448 preempt_count = 1; |
|
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4449 |
| 314 | 4450 detect_input_pending (); |
| 25012 | 4451 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
| 314 | 4452 { |
| 4453 pause = 1; | |
| 4454 goto do_pause; | |
| 4455 } | |
| 4456 | |
| 764 | 4457 update_begin (f); |
| 314 | 4458 |
| 25012 | 4459 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
| 314 | 4460 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
| 25012 | 4461 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
|
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4462 |
| 493 | 4463 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
| 25012 | 4464 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
| 4465 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
| 4466 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
| 314 | 4467 break; |
| 4468 | |
| 4469 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
| 25012 | 4470 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
| 4471 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
| 314 | 4472 |
| 4473 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
| 25012 | 4474 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
| 4475 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
| 4476 | |
| 4477 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
| 4478 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
| 314 | 4479 { |
| 25012 | 4480 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
| 314 | 4481 { |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4482 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
| 314 | 4483 { |
| 4484 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
| 4485 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
| 4486 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
| 4487 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
| 4488 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
| 4489 if (outq > 900 | |
| 4490 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
| 4491 { | |
| 4492 fflush (stdout); | |
| 4493 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
| 4494 { | |
| 554 | 4495 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
| 4496 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
| 314 | 4497 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
| 25012 | 4498 * the outq count. */ |
| 314 | 4499 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
| 4500 #endif | |
| 4501 outq *= 10; | |
|
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4502 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
|
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4503 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
| 314 | 4504 } |
| 4505 } | |
| 4506 } | |
| 4507 | |
|
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4508 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
|
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4509 detect_input_pending (); |
|
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4510 |
| 25012 | 4511 update_frame_line (f, i); |
| 314 | 4512 } |
| 4513 } | |
| 25012 | 4514 |
| 764 | 4515 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
| 314 | 4516 |
| 4517 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
| 4518 if (!pause) | |
| 4519 { | |
|
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4520 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
| 25012 | 4521 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
|
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4522 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
| 25012 | 4523 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
|
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4524 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
|
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4525 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4526 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
|
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4527 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
| 25012 | 4528 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
|
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4529 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
|
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4530 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
| 708 | 4531 { |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4532 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4533 int row, col; |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4534 |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4535 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4536 { |
| 25012 | 4537 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
| 4538 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4539 row = top; |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4540 col = 0; |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4541 } |
| 708 | 4542 else |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4543 { |
| 25012 | 4544 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
| 4545 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
| 4546 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
| 4547 any text on it. */ | |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4548 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4549 do |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4550 { |
| 25012 | 4551 --row; |
| 4552 col = 0; | |
| 4553 | |
| 4554 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
| 4555 { | |
| 4556 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
| 4557 must be ignored here. */ | |
| 4558 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
| 4559 row); | |
| 4560 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 4561 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 4562 | |
| 4563 while (last > start | |
| 4564 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
| 4565 --last; | |
| 4566 | |
| 4567 col = last - start; | |
| 4568 } | |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4569 } |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4570 while (row > top && col == 0); |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4571 |
|
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4572 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
|
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4573 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4574 { |
|
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4575 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4576 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
|
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4577 { |
|
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4578 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
|
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4579 row++; |
|
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4580 } |
|
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4581 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
|
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4582 else |
|
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4583 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
|
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4584 } |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4585 } |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4586 |
|
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4587 cursor_to (row, col); |
| 708 | 4588 } |
| 314 | 4589 else |
| 25012 | 4590 { |
| 4591 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
| 4592 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
| 4593 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
| 4594 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0) | |
| 4595 { | |
| 4596 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
| 4597 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
| 4598 | |
| 4599 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
| 4600 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
| 4601 | |
| 4602 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
| 4603 cursor_to (y, x); | |
| 4604 } | |
| 4605 } | |
| 314 | 4606 } |
| 4607 | |
| 764 | 4608 update_end (f); |
| 314 | 4609 |
| 4610 if (termscript) | |
| 4611 fflush (termscript); | |
| 4612 fflush (stdout); | |
| 4613 | |
| 4614 do_pause: | |
| 4615 | |
| 4616 display_completed = !pause; | |
| 25012 | 4617 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
| 314 | 4618 return pause; |
| 4619 } | |
| 4620 | |
| 25012 | 4621 |
| 4622 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
| 314 | 4623 |
| 21514 | 4624 int |
| 764 | 4625 scrolling (frame) |
| 25012 | 4626 struct frame *frame; |
| 314 | 4627 { |
| 4628 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
| 4629 int window_size; | |
| 4630 int changed_lines; | |
| 764 | 4631 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
| 4632 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
| 4633 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
|
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4634 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
| 314 | 4635 register int i; |
| 764 | 4636 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
| 25012 | 4637 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
| 4638 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
| 4639 | |
| 4640 if (!current_matrix) | |
| 4641 abort (); | |
| 4642 | |
| 4643 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
| 4644 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
| 4645 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
| 314 | 4646 changed_lines = 0; |
| 4647 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
| 764 | 4648 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
| 4649 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
| 314 | 4650 { |
| 4651 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
| 25012 | 4652 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
| 314 | 4653 return 0; |
| 25012 | 4654 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
| 4655 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
|
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4656 { |
|
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4657 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
|
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4658 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
|
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4659 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
|
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4660 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
|
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4661 } |
| 314 | 4662 else |
|
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4663 { |
| 25012 | 4664 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
| 4665 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
|
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4666 } |
| 314 | 4667 |
| 4668 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
| 4669 { | |
| 4670 changed_lines++; | |
| 764 | 4671 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
| 314 | 4672 } |
| 4673 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
| 4674 unchanged_at_top++; | |
| 25012 | 4675 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
| 314 | 4676 } |
| 4677 | |
| 4678 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
| 25012 | 4679 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
| 764 | 4680 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
| 314 | 4681 return 1; |
| 4682 | |
| 764 | 4683 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
| 314 | 4684 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
| 4685 | |
| 4686 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
| 4687 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
| 764 | 4688 else if (memory_below_frame) |
| 314 | 4689 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
| 4690 | |
| 4691 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
| 25012 | 4692 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
|
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4693 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
| 314 | 4694 && (window_size >= |
| 4695 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
| 764 | 4696 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
| 314 | 4697 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
| 4698 return 0; | |
| 4699 | |
| 25012 | 4700 if (window_size < 2) |
| 4701 return 0; | |
| 4702 | |
| 764 | 4703 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
| 314 | 4704 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
|
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4705 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
| 314 | 4706 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
| 4707 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
| 4708 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
| 4709 | |
| 4710 return 0; | |
| 4711 } | |
| 25012 | 4712 |
| 4713 | |
| 4714 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
| 4715 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
| 4716 | |
| 4717 static int | |
| 4718 count_blanks (r, len) | |
| 4719 struct glyph *r; | |
| 4720 int len; | |
| 314 | 4721 { |
| 25012 | 4722 int i; |
| 4723 | |
| 4724 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
| 4725 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
| 4726 break; | |
| 4727 | |
| 4728 return i; | |
| 314 | 4729 } |
| 25012 | 4730 |
| 4731 | |
| 4732 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
| 4733 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
| 4734 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
| 314 | 4735 |
| 4736 static int | |
| 25012 | 4737 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
| 4738 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
| 314 | 4739 { |
| 25012 | 4740 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
| 4741 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
| 4742 | |
| 4743 while (p1 < end1 | |
| 4744 && p2 < end2 | |
| 4745 && GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p1) == GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p2)) | |
| 4746 ++p1, ++p2; | |
| 4747 | |
| 4748 return p1 - str1; | |
| 314 | 4749 } |
| 4750 | |
| 25012 | 4751 |
| 314 | 4752 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
| 25012 | 4753 |
| 314 | 4754 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
|
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4755 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
| 314 | 4756 |
| 25012 | 4757 |
| 4758 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
| 4759 | |
| 314 | 4760 static void |
| 25012 | 4761 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
| 4762 register struct frame *frame; | |
| 314 | 4763 int vpos; |
| 4764 { | |
| 25012 | 4765 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
| 314 | 4766 int tem; |
| 4767 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
| 25012 | 4768 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
| 4769 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
| 4770 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
| 4771 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
| 4772 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
| 4773 | |
| 4774 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
| 4775 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
| 314 | 4776 { |
| 25012 | 4777 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
| 4778 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
| 4779 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
| 314 | 4780 } |
| 4781 else | |
| 25012 | 4782 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
| 4783 | |
| 4784 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; | |
| 4785 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
| 314 | 4786 { |
| 25012 | 4787 /* A line that is not enabled is empty. */ |
| 4788 obody = 0; | |
| 314 | 4789 olen = 0; |
| 4790 } | |
| 4791 else | |
| 4792 { | |
| 25012 | 4793 /* A line not empty in the current matrix. */ |
| 4794 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); | |
| 4795 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 4796 | |
| 4797 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
| 314 | 4798 { |
| 25012 | 4799 /* Ignore trailing spaces. */ |
| 314 | 4800 if (!must_write_spaces) |
| 25012 | 4801 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
| 314 | 4802 olen--; |
| 4803 } | |
| 4804 else | |
| 4805 { | |
| 25012 | 4806 /* For an inverse-video line, remember we gave it spaces all |
| 4807 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video | |
| 4808 extends all the way across. */ | |
| 4809 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
| 4810 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
| 314 | 4811 } |
| 4812 } | |
| 4813 | |
| 25012 | 4814 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
| 4815 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 4816 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
| 4817 | |
| 4818 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
| 4819 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
| 314 | 4820 { |
| 4821 nlen = 0; | |
| 4822 goto just_erase; | |
| 4823 } | |
| 4824 | |
| 25012 | 4825 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
| 4826 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 4827 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
| 4828 | |
| 4829 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
| 4830 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
| 4831 { | |
|
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4832 if (!must_write_spaces) |
|
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4833 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
|
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4834 --nlen; |
|
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4835 |
|
25318
441b16431fdd
(update_frame_line): Fix previous change. If writing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25313
diff
changeset
|
4836 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
|
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4837 if (nlen) |
|
25318
441b16431fdd
(update_frame_line): Fix previous change. If writing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25313
diff
changeset
|
4838 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
|
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4839 |
|
25318
441b16431fdd
(update_frame_line): Fix previous change. If writing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25313
diff
changeset
|
4840 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
| 25012 | 4841 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
| 4842 return; | |
| 4843 } | |
| 314 | 4844 |
| 4845 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
| 4846 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
| 25012 | 4847 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
| 314 | 4848 { |
| 4849 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
| 25012 | 4850 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
| 314 | 4851 nlen--; |
| 4852 } | |
| 4853 else | |
| 4854 { | |
| 25012 | 4855 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
| 4856 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
| 4857 all the way across. */ | |
| 4858 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
| 4859 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
| 314 | 4860 } |
| 4861 | |
| 4862 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
| 4863 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
| 4864 { | |
| 25012 | 4865 int i, j; |
| 4866 | |
| 4867 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
| 4868 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
| 314 | 4869 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
| 4870 { | |
| 25012 | 4871 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
| 314 | 4872 { |
| 25012 | 4873 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
| 4874 j = i + 1; | |
| 4875 while (j < nlen | |
| 4876 && (j >= olen | |
| 4877 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
| 4878 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
| 4879 ++j; | |
| 4880 | |
| 4881 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
| 314 | 4882 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
| 25012 | 4883 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
| 4884 i = j - 1; | |
| 314 | 4885 |
| 4886 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
| 4887 } | |
| 4888 } | |
| 4889 | |
| 4890 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
| 4891 if (olen > nlen) | |
| 4892 { | |
| 4893 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
| 4894 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
| 4895 } | |
| 4896 | |
| 25012 | 4897 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
| 4898 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
| 314 | 4899 return; |
| 4900 } | |
| 4901 | |
| 25012 | 4902 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
| 4903 characters in a row. */ | |
| 4904 | |
| 314 | 4905 if (!olen) |
| 4906 { | |
| 25012 | 4907 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
| 4908 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
| 4909 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
| 4910 nsp = 0; | |
| 4911 else | |
| 4912 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
| 4913 | |
| 314 | 4914 if (nlen > nsp) |
| 4915 { | |
| 4916 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
| 4917 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
| 4918 } | |
| 4919 | |
| 764 | 4920 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
| 25012 | 4921 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
| 314 | 4922 return; |
| 4923 } | |
| 4924 | |
| 4925 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
| 25012 | 4926 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
| 4927 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
| 4928 | |
| 4929 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
| 4930 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
| 4931 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
| 314 | 4932 |
| 4933 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
| 4934 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
| 4935 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
| 4936 { | |
| 4937 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
| 25012 | 4938 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
| 4939 ++begmatch; | |
| 314 | 4940 } |
| 4941 | |
| 4942 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
| 4943 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
| 25012 | 4944 when the following text does not match. */ |
| 314 | 4945 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
| 4946 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
| 4947 | |
| 4948 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
| 4949 op1 = obody + olen; | |
| 4950 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
| 4951 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
| 25012 | 4952 while (op1 > op2 |
| 4953 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
| 314 | 4954 { |
| 4955 op1--; | |
| 4956 np1--; | |
| 4957 } | |
| 4958 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
| 4959 | |
| 4960 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
| 4961 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
| 4962 Is it worth it? */ | |
| 4963 | |
| 4964 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
| 4965 if (endmatch && tem | |
| 764 | 4966 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
| 314 | 4967 endmatch = 0; |
| 4968 | |
| 4969 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
| 4970 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
| 4971 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
| 4972 Is it worth it? */ | |
| 4973 | |
| 4974 if (nsp != osp | |
| 4975 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
| 764 | 4976 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
| 314 | 4977 { |
| 4978 begmatch = 0; | |
| 4979 endmatch = 0; | |
| 4980 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
| 4981 } | |
| 4982 | |
| 4983 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
| 4984 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
| 4985 | |
| 4986 if (osp > nsp) | |
| 4987 { | |
| 4988 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
| 4989 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
| 4990 } | |
| 4991 else if (nsp > osp) | |
| 4992 { | |
| 4993 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
| 4994 and insert earlier in the line, | |
| 4995 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
| 4996 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
| 4997 { | |
| 4998 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
| 4999 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
| 5000 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
| 5001 } | |
| 5002 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
| 25012 | 5003 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
| 314 | 5004 } |
| 5005 olen += nsp - osp; | |
| 5006 | |
| 5007 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
| 5008 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
| 5009 { | |
| 5010 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
| 5011 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
| 5012 { | |
| 5013 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
| 5014 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
| 5015 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
| 5016 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
|
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5017 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
| 314 | 5018 olen = 0; |
| 5019 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
| 5020 } | |
| 5021 else if (nlen > olen) | |
| 5022 { | |
|
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5023 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5024 ---------------------------------------- |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5025 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5026 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5027 ---------------------------------------- |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5028 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5029 is a padding glyph. */ |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5030 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5031 int del; |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5032 |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5033 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
| 25012 | 5034 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
|
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5035 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
| 25012 | 5036 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
|
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5037 del = olen - tem - out; |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5038 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5039 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
|
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5040 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
| 314 | 5041 olen = nlen; |
| 5042 } | |
| 5043 else if (olen > nlen) | |
| 5044 { | |
| 5045 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
| 5046 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
| 5047 olen = nlen; | |
| 5048 } | |
| 5049 } | |
| 5050 | |
| 5051 just_erase: | |
| 5052 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
| 5053 if (olen > nlen) | |
| 5054 { | |
| 5055 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
| 5056 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
| 5057 } | |
| 5058 | |
| 764 | 5059 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
| 25012 | 5060 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
| 314 | 5061 } |
| 25012 | 5062 |
| 5063 | |
| 314 | 5064 |
| 25012 | 5065 /*********************************************************************** |
| 5066 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
| 5067 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 5068 | |
| 5069 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
| 5070 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
| 5071 boundaries. */ | |
| 5072 | |
| 5073 int | |
| 5074 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
| 5075 struct window *w; | |
| 5076 int *x, *y; | |
|
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5077 { |
| 25012 | 5078 struct it it; |
| 5079 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
| 5080 struct text_pos startp; | |
| 5081 int left_area_width; | |
| 5082 | |
| 5083 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
| 5084 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
| 5085 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
| 5086 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
| 5087 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
| 5088 | |
| 5089 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
| 5090 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
| 5091 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
| 5092 | |
| 5093 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
| 5094 *y = it.current_y; | |
| 5095 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
| 5096 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
| 5097 } | |
| 5098 | |
| 5099 | |
| 5100 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
| 5101 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
| 5102 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
| 5103 the string returned. */ | |
| 5104 | |
| 5105 Lisp_Object | |
| 5106 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
| 5107 struct window *w; | |
| 5108 int x, y; | |
| 5109 int *charpos; | |
| 5110 { | |
| 5111 struct glyph_row *row; | |
| 5112 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
| 5113 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
| 5114 int x0; | |
| 5115 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
| 5116 | |
| 5117 /* Only do this for frames under a window system. */ | |
| 5118 if (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
|
9650
4295137050dd
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p):
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9572
diff
changeset
|
5119 return Qnil; |
| 25012 | 5120 |
| 5121 if (mode_line_p) | |
| 5122 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
| 5123 else | |
| 25546 | 5124 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
| 25012 | 5125 |
| 5126 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
|
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5127 { |
| 25012 | 5128 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
| 5129 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
| 5130 and bitmap area width. */ | |
| 5131 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
| 5132 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
|
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5133 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
| 25012 | 5134 |
| 5135 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
| 5136 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
| 5137 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 5138 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
| 5139 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
| 5140 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
| 5141 { | |
| 5142 string = glyph->object; | |
| 5143 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
| 5144 break; | |
| 5145 } | |
|
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5146 } |
| 25012 | 5147 |
| 5148 return string; | |
|
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5149 } |
| 25012 | 5150 |
| 5151 | |
| 5152 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 5153 Changing Frame Sizes | |
| 5154 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 314 | 5155 |
| 5156 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
| 25012 | 5157 |
| 493 | 5158 SIGTYPE |
|
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5159 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
| 25012 | 5160 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
| 314 | 5161 { |
| 5162 int width, height; | |
| 5163 extern int errno; | |
| 5164 int old_errno = errno; | |
| 5165 | |
| 764 | 5166 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
| 314 | 5167 |
| 764 | 5168 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
| 5169 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
| 314 | 5170 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
| 764 | 5171 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
| 314 | 5172 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
| 5173 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
| 5174 | |
| 5175 { | |
|
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5176 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
| 314 | 5177 |
|
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5178 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
| 314 | 5179 { |
|
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5180 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
| 314 | 5181 { |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5182 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
| 314 | 5183 break; |
| 5184 } | |
| 5185 } | |
| 5186 } | |
| 5187 | |
| 5188 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
| 5189 errno = old_errno; | |
| 5190 } | |
| 5191 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
| 5192 | |
| 5193 | |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5194 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5195 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5196 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
| 314 | 5197 |
| 21514 | 5198 void |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5199 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5200 int safe; |
| 314 | 5201 { |
| 5202 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5203 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5204 return; |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5205 |
| 314 | 5206 while (delayed_size_change) |
| 5207 { | |
|
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5208 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
| 314 | 5209 |
| 5210 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
| 5211 | |
|
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5212 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
| 314 | 5213 { |
| 25012 | 5214 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
|
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5215 |
| 764 | 5216 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
| 5217 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
| 314 | 5218 |
|
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5219 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5220 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
| 314 | 5221 } |
| 5222 } | |
| 5223 } | |
| 5224 | |
| 5225 | |
| 764 | 5226 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5227 indicate no change is to take place. |
| 314 | 5228 |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5229 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
|
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5230 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
|
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5231 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5232 from a signal handler. |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5233 |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5234 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
|
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5235 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5236 |
| 21514 | 5237 void |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5238 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
| 25012 | 5239 register struct frame *f; |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5240 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
|
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5241 { |
|
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5242 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
|
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5243 |
|
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5244 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
|
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5245 { |
|
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5246 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
|
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5247 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
|
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5248 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
|
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5249 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
|
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5250 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5251 pretend, delay, safe); |
|
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5252 } |
|
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5253 else |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5254 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
|
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5255 } |
|
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5256 |
|
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5257 static void |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5258 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
| 25012 | 5259 register struct frame *f; |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5260 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
| 314 | 5261 { |
|
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5262 int new_frame_window_width; |
|
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5263 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
|
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5264 |
| 314 | 5265 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
|
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5266 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
| 314 | 5267 { |
| 25012 | 5268 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
| 5269 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
| 314 | 5270 delayed_size_change = 1; |
| 5271 return; | |
| 5272 } | |
| 5273 | |
| 764 | 5274 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
| 25012 | 5275 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
| 5276 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5277 |
|
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5278 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
|
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5279 if (newheight == 0) |
| 25012 | 5280 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
|
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5281 if (newwidth == 0) |
| 25012 | 5282 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
| 5283 | |
| 5284 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
| 5285 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
| 5286 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
|
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5287 |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5288 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
| 25012 | 5289 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5290 |
|
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5291 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
| 25012 | 5292 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
| 5293 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
| 314 | 5294 return; |
| 5295 | |
| 15078 | 5296 BLOCK_INPUT; |
| 5297 | |
|
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5298 #ifdef MSDOS |
|
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5299 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
|
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5300 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
|
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5301 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
|
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5302 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
|
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5303 #endif |
|
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5304 |
| 25012 | 5305 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
| 314 | 5306 { |
| 25012 | 5307 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
| 314 | 5308 { |
| 25012 | 5309 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
| 5310 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
| 5311 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
| 5312 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
| 5313 (newheight | |
| 5314 - 1 | |
| 5315 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
| 5316 0); | |
| 5317 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
|
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5318 newheight - 1); |
| 25012 | 5319 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
| 314 | 5320 } |
| 5321 else | |
| 764 | 5322 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
| 25012 | 5323 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
| 5324 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
| 5325 | |
| 5326 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
|
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5327 FrameRows = newheight; |
| 314 | 5328 } |
| 5329 | |
| 25012 | 5330 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
| 314 | 5331 { |
| 25012 | 5332 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
| 5333 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
| 5334 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
| 5335 | |
| 5336 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
| 764 | 5337 FrameCols = newwidth; |
| 25012 | 5338 |
|
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5339 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
|
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5340 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
| 314 | 5341 } |
| 5342 | |
| 25012 | 5343 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
| 5344 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
| 5345 | |
| 5346 { | |
| 5347 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
| 5348 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
| 5349 | |
| 5350 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
| 5351 &text_area_height); | |
| 5352 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
| 5353 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
| 5354 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
| 5355 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
| 5356 } | |
| 5357 | |
| 5358 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
| 5359 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
| 5360 calculate_costs (f); | |
| 15065 | 5361 |
| 5362 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
|
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5363 |
|
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5364 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
|
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5365 |
|
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5366 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
| 25012 | 5367 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
| 5368 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
|
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5369 |
|
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5370 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
| 314 | 5371 } |
| 25012 | 5372 |
| 5373 | |
| 314 | 5374 |
| 25012 | 5375 /*********************************************************************** |
| 5376 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
| 5377 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 5378 | |
| 5379 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
| 5380 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
| 5381 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
| 5382 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
| 5383 (file) | |
| 5384 Lisp_Object file; | |
| 5385 { | |
| 5386 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
| 5387 termscript = 0; | |
| 5388 | |
| 5389 if (! NILP (file)) | |
| 5390 { | |
| 5391 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
| 5392 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
| 5393 if (termscript == 0) | |
| 5394 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
| 5395 } | |
| 5396 return Qnil; | |
| 5397 } | |
| 5398 | |
| 5399 | |
| 314 | 5400 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
| 5401 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
| 5402 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
| 5403 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
|
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5404 (string) |
|
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5405 Lisp_Object string; |
| 314 | 5406 { |
|
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5407 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
|
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5408 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
|
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5409 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
| 314 | 5410 fflush (stdout); |
| 5411 if (termscript) | |
| 5412 { | |
|
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5413 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
|
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5414 termscript); |
| 314 | 5415 fflush (termscript); |
| 5416 } | |
| 5417 return Qnil; | |
| 5418 } | |
| 5419 | |
| 25012 | 5420 |
| 314 | 5421 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
| 5422 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
| 5423 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
| 5424 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
| 5425 (arg) | |
| 5426 Lisp_Object arg; | |
| 5427 { | |
| 493 | 5428 if (!NILP (arg)) |
| 314 | 5429 { |
|
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5430 if (noninteractive) |
|
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5431 putchar (07); |
|
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5432 else |
|
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5433 ring_bell (); |
| 314 | 5434 fflush (stdout); |
| 5435 } | |
| 5436 else | |
| 5437 bitch_at_user (); | |
| 5438 | |
| 5439 return Qnil; | |
| 5440 } | |
| 5441 | |
| 21514 | 5442 void |
| 314 | 5443 bitch_at_user () |
| 5444 { | |
| 5445 if (noninteractive) | |
| 5446 putchar (07); | |
| 25012 | 5447 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
| 314 | 5448 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
| 5449 else | |
| 5450 ring_bell (); | |
| 5451 fflush (stdout); | |
| 5452 } | |
| 5453 | |
| 25012 | 5454 |
| 5455 | |
| 5456 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 5457 Sleeping, Waiting | |
| 5458 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 5459 | |
| 314 | 5460 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5461 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
| 2648 | 5462 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
| 5463 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
| 5464 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
| 5465 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
| 5466 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5467 (seconds, milliseconds) |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5468 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
| 314 | 5469 { |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5470 int sec, usec; |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5471 |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5472 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
|
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5473 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5474 else |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5475 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
| 2648 | 5476 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
| 5477 | |
| 5478 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
| 5479 { | |
| 5480 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
| 5481 sec = (int) duration; | |
| 5482 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
| 5483 } | |
| 5484 #else | |
| 5485 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
| 5486 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
| 5487 #endif | |
| 314 | 5488 |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5489 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5490 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5491 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5492 #endif |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5493 |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5494 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5495 if (usec < 0) |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5496 { |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5497 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5498 if (-1000000 < usec) |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5499 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5500 else |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5501 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5502 } |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5503 else |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5504 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5505 |
|
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5506 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
| 314 | 5507 return Qnil; |
| 5508 | |
| 650 | 5509 { |
| 5510 Lisp_Object zero; | |
| 5511 | |
|
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5512 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
| 650 | 5513 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
| 5514 } | |
| 587 | 5515 |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5516 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5517 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5518 #if 0 |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5519 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
| 314 | 5520 immediate_quit = 1; |
| 5521 QUIT; | |
| 5522 | |
| 5523 #ifdef VMS | |
| 5524 sys_sleep (sec); | |
| 5525 #else /* not VMS */ | |
| 5526 /* The reason this is done this way | |
| 5527 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
| 5528 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
| 5529 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
| 554 | 5530 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
| 5531 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
| 587 | 5532 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
| 554 | 5533 |
| 314 | 5534 while (1) |
| 5535 { | |
| 554 | 5536 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
| 5537 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
| 5538 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
| 5539 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
| 314 | 5540 break; |
| 5541 } | |
| 5542 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
| 5543 sleep (sec); | |
| 5544 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
| 5545 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
| 5546 | |
| 5547 immediate_quit = 0; | |
| 5548 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
| 5549 | |
| 5550 return Qnil; | |
| 5551 } | |
| 5552 | |
| 25012 | 5553 |
| 650 | 5554 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
| 5555 it does the redisplay. | |
| 5556 | |
|
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5557 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
|
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5558 waiting for input as well. */ |
| 650 | 5559 |
| 5560 Lisp_Object | |
|
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5561 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
|
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5562 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
| 314 | 5563 { |
| 650 | 5564 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
| 314 | 5565 |
|
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5566 swallow_events (display); |
|
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5567 |
|
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5568 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
| 314 | 5569 return Qnil; |
| 650 | 5570 |
|
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5571 if (initial_display) |
| 314 | 5572 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
| 5573 | |
| 673 | 5574 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
| 5575 return Qt; | |
| 5576 | |
| 314 | 5577 #ifdef SIGIO |
|
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5578 gobble_input (0); |
| 650 | 5579 #endif |
| 5580 | |
|
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5581 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
| 650 | 5582 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
| 5583 | |
| 314 | 5584 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
| 5585 } | |
| 5586 | |
| 25012 | 5587 |
| 650 | 5588 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5589 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
| 2648 | 5590 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
| 5591 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
| 5592 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
| 5593 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
| 5594 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
|
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5595 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
| 650 | 5596 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
| 5597 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
| 5598 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5599 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5600 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
| 650 | 5601 { |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5602 int sec, usec; |
| 650 | 5603 |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5604 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
|
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5605 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5606 else |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5607 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
| 2648 | 5608 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
| 5609 | |
| 5610 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
| 5611 { | |
| 5612 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
| 5613 sec = (int) duration; | |
| 5614 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
| 5615 } | |
| 5616 #else | |
| 5617 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
| 5618 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
| 5619 #endif | |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5620 |
| 650 | 5621 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
|
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5622 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
|
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5623 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
| 650 | 5624 #endif |
| 5625 | |
|
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5626 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
| 650 | 5627 } |
| 25012 | 5628 |
| 5629 | |
| 314 | 5630 |
| 25012 | 5631 /*********************************************************************** |
| 5632 Other Lisp Functions | |
| 5633 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 5634 | |
| 5635 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
| 5636 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
| 5637 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
| 5638 add length checks). */ | |
| 5639 | |
| 5640 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
| 5641 | |
| 5642 | |
| 5643 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
| 5644 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
| 5645 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
| 5646 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
| 5647 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
| 5648 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
| 5649 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
| 5650 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
| 5651 the current state.\n") | |
| 5652 () | |
| 5653 { | |
| 5654 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
| 5655 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
| 5656 int n; | |
| 5657 | |
| 5658 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
| 5659 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
| 5660 { | |
| 5661 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
| 5662 goto changed; | |
| 5663 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
| 5664 goto changed; | |
| 5665 } | |
| 5666 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
| 5667 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
| 5668 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
| 5669 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
| 5670 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
| 5671 { | |
| 5672 buf = XCONS (XCONS (tail)->car)->cdr; | |
| 5673 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ | |
| 5674 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
| 5675 continue; | |
| 5676 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
| 5677 goto changed; | |
| 5678 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
| 5679 goto changed; | |
| 5680 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
| 5681 goto changed; | |
| 5682 } | |
| 5683 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
| 5684 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
| 5685 return Qnil; | |
| 5686 changed: | |
| 5687 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
| 5688 n = 1; | |
| 5689 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
| 5690 n += 2; | |
| 5691 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
| 5692 n += 3; | |
| 5693 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
| 5694 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
| 5695 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
| 5696 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
| 5697 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
| 5698 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
| 5699 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
| 5700 { | |
| 5701 *vecp++ = frame; | |
| 5702 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
| 5703 } | |
| 5704 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
| 5705 { | |
| 5706 buf = XCONS (XCONS (tail)->car)->cdr; | |
| 5707 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ | |
| 5708 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
| 5709 continue; | |
| 5710 *vecp++ = buf; | |
| 5711 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
| 5712 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
| 5713 } | |
| 5714 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
| 5715 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
| 5716 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
| 5717 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
| 5718 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
| 5719 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
| 5720 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
| 5721 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
| 5722 abort (); | |
| 5723 return Qt; | |
| 5724 } | |
| 5725 | |
| 5726 | |
| 5727 | |
| 5728 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 5729 Initialization | |
| 5730 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 5731 | |
| 314 | 5732 char *terminal_type; |
| 5733 | |
| 25012 | 5734 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
| 5735 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
| 5736 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
| 314 | 5737 |
| 21514 | 5738 void |
| 314 | 5739 init_display () |
| 5740 { | |
| 5741 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
| 5742 extern int display_arg; | |
| 5743 #endif | |
| 5744 | |
| 25012 | 5745 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
| 5746 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
| 5747 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
| 5748 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
| 5749 | |
| 314 | 5750 meta_key = 0; |
| 5751 inverse_video = 0; | |
| 5752 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
| 5753 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
| 5754 | |
|
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5755 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
|
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5756 during startup. */ |
|
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5757 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
| 314 | 5758 |
|
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5759 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
|
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5760 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
|
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5761 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
|
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5762 using the window system. |
|
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5763 |
|
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5764 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
|
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5765 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
| 314 | 5766 |
| 5767 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
|
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5768 if (! display_arg) |
|
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5769 { |
|
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5770 char *display; |
|
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5771 #ifdef VMS |
|
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5772 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
|
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5773 #else |
|
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5774 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
|
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5775 #endif |
|
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5776 |
|
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5777 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
| 2364 | 5778 } |
|
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5779 |
|
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5780 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
|
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5781 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
|
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5782 && initialized |
|
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5783 #endif |
|
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5784 ) |
| 314 | 5785 { |
| 5786 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
| 5787 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
| 5788 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
| 5789 #else | |
| 5790 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
| 5791 #endif | |
|
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5792 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
|
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5793 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
| 15282 | 5794 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
|
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5795 So call tgetent. */ |
|
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5796 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
|
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5797 #endif |
| 25012 | 5798 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
| 314 | 5799 return; |
| 5800 } | |
| 5801 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
| 5802 | |
|
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5803 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5804 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5805 { |
|
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
5806 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
|
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5807 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
| 25012 | 5808 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
|
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5809 return; |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5810 } |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5811 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
|
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5812 |
| 314 | 5813 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
| 5814 if (! isatty (0)) | |
| 5815 { | |
|
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5816 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
| 314 | 5817 exit (1); |
| 5818 } | |
| 5819 | |
| 5820 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
| 5821 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
| 5822 if (!terminal_type) | |
| 5823 { | |
| 5824 #ifdef VMS | |
| 5825 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
| 5826 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
| 5827 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
| 5828 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
| 5829 #else | |
| 5830 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
| 5831 #endif | |
| 5832 exit (1); | |
| 5833 } | |
| 5834 | |
| 5835 #ifdef VMS | |
| 25012 | 5836 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
| 314 | 5837 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
| 5838 { | |
| 5839 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
| 5840 char *p; | |
| 5841 | |
| 5842 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
| 5843 | |
| 5844 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
| 5845 if (isupper (*p)) | |
| 5846 *p = tolower (*p); | |
| 5847 | |
| 5848 terminal_type = new; | |
| 5849 } | |
| 25012 | 5850 #endif /* VMS */ |
| 314 | 5851 |
| 5852 term_init (terminal_type); | |
| 25012 | 5853 |
|
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5854 { |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5855 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
|
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5856 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
|
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5857 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
|
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5858 |
| 25012 | 5859 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
| 5860 | |
| 5861 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
| 5862 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
| 5863 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
|
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5864 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
|
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5865 } |
|
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5866 |
| 25012 | 5867 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
|
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5868 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
| 314 | 5869 |
| 5870 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
| 5871 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
| 5872 if (initialized) | |
| 5873 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
| 5874 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
| 5875 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
| 25012 | 5876 |
| 5877 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
| 5878 if (initialized | |
| 5879 && !noninteractive | |
|
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5880 #ifdef MSDOS |
|
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5881 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
|
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5882 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
|
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5883 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
|
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5884 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
|
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5885 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
|
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5886 #endif |
| 25012 | 5887 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
| 5888 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); | |
| 314 | 5889 } |
| 25012 | 5890 |
| 5891 | |
| 314 | 5892 |
| 25012 | 5893 /*********************************************************************** |
| 5894 Blinking cursor | |
| 5895 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 5896 | |
| 5897 DEFUN ("show-cursor", Fshow_cursor, Sshow_cursor, 0, 2, 0, | |
| 5898 "Change visibility flag of the text cursor of WINDOW.\n\ | |
| 5899 ON_P nil means toggle the flag. Otherwise, ON_P must be an integer,\n\ | |
| 5900 and the flag is set according to the value of ON_P. WINDOW nil or\n\ | |
| 5901 omitted means use the selected window. The new cursor state takes effect\n\ | |
| 5902 with the next redisplay.") | |
| 5903 (on_p, window) | |
| 5904 Lisp_Object on_p, window; | |
| 5905 { | |
| 5906 struct window *w; | |
| 5907 | |
| 5908 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
| 5909 output routines. */ | |
| 5910 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
| 5911 { | |
| 5912 if (NILP (window)) | |
| 5913 window = selected_window; | |
| 5914 else | |
| 5915 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
| 5916 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
| 5917 | |
| 5918 if (NILP (on_p)) | |
| 5919 w->cursor_off_p = !w->cursor_off_p; | |
| 5920 else | |
| 5921 { | |
| 5922 CHECK_NUMBER (on_p, 1); | |
| 5923 w->cursor_off_p = XINT (on_p) != 0; | |
| 5924 } | |
| 5925 } | |
| 5926 | |
| 5927 return Qnil; | |
| 5928 } | |
| 5929 | |
| 5930 | |
| 5931 | |
| 5932 /*********************************************************************** | |
| 5933 Initialization | |
| 5934 ***********************************************************************/ | |
| 5935 | |
| 21514 | 5936 void |
| 314 | 5937 syms_of_display () |
| 5938 { | |
| 764 | 5939 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
| 314 | 5940 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
|
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5941 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
| 314 | 5942 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
| 5943 defsubr (&Sding); | |
| 5944 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
| 5945 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
| 5946 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
| 25012 | 5947 defsubr (&Sshow_cursor); |
| 314 | 5948 |
|
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
5949 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
|
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5950 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
|
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5951 |
|
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5952 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
|
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5953 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
|
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5954 |
| 314 | 5955 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
|
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
5956 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
| 314 | 5957 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
| 5958 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
| 25012 | 5959 |
| 314 | 5960 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
| 764 | 5961 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
| 314 | 5962 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
| 25012 | 5963 |
| 314 | 5964 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
| 764 | 5965 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
| 25012 | 5966 |
| 314 | 5967 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
| 764 | 5968 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
| 314 | 5969 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
| 764 | 5970 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
| 314 | 5971 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
| 25012 | 5972 |
| 314 | 5973 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
| 5974 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
| 5975 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
| 25012 | 5976 |
| 314 | 5977 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
| 5978 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
| 5979 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
| 25012 | 5980 |
| 314 | 5981 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
| 5982 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
| 25012 | 5983 |
| 314 | 5984 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
| 764 | 5985 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
| 314 | 5986 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
| 5987 Each element can be:\n\ | |
| 5988 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
| 5989 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
| 5990 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
| 6857 | 5991 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
| 314 | 5992 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
| 5993 | |
| 5994 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
| 5995 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
| 5996 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
| 5997 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
| 5998 | |
| 25012 | 5999 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
| 6000 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
| 6001 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
| 6002 | |
| 314 | 6003 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
| 6004 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
| 6005 if (noninteractive) | |
| 6006 #endif | |
| 6007 { | |
| 6008 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
| 6009 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
| 6010 } | |
| 6011 } |
